Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame Users Manual Exhibit

Users Manual Exhibit

1X SCt 4812T BTSOptimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.1.x800, 1700, and 1900 MHzCDMAEnglishAug 200268P09255A61-4FIELD TRIAL
NoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resultingfrom any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in thisdocument has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed forinaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves theright to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any personof revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines andprograms), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not beconstrued to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describecopyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws inthe United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, includingthe exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in thisinstruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the expresswritten permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant eitherdirectly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications ofMotorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreementonly and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of thesoftware or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into anylanguage or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOTdesigned, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environmentsrequiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specificallydisclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.Trademarks and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or servicesprofiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.Copyright Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc. All Rights ReservedPrinted on Recyclable PaperREV012501SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALiAug 20021X SCt 4812T BTSOptimization/ATPTable of Contents...
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALii Aug 2002ContentsForeword xvi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History xxi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patent Notification xxii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scope of This Document 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA LMF Product Description 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Optimize? 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Optimization? 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Specifications 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Hardware Requirements 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment List 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documentation 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended Reader Profile 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Overview 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical BTS 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Frame Description 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Module Location & Identification 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Configuration 1-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Power-up Tests 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objective 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALiiiAug 2002DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power-up Tests 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up Procedures 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power-up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-Site Data File 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Operating System Installation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy CDF Files from CBSC 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folder Structure Overview 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CDMA LMF 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LMF Operation 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface Overview 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line Interface Overview 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging into a BTS 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS - Overview 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download Code to Devices 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select CSM Clock Source 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CSMs 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Redundant GLIs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM & LFR Background 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel LEDs 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Null Modem Cable 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Initialization/Verification 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSO Initialization/Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALiv Aug 2002Test Equipment Set-up 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Test Sets 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Reference Chart 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup for TX Calibration 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup for Optimization/ATP 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX ATP Setup 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration Background 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Test Set Calibration 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Equipment 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Coupler Loss Values 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Audit 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit Test 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Set-up and Calibration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameter Settings 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valid NAM Ranges 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objective 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundancy/Alarm Test 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Redundancy 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALvAug 2002Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX Redundancy 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Redundancy Test 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Alarms Testing 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Test Overview 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Tests 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Prerequisites 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX OUT Connection 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx Mask Test 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rho Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power Test 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate an ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating CBSC LMF Files 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Removal 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALvi Aug 2002Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Load BLO 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal operation 6-8. . . . . . . . Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-FER Test Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No GPS Reference Source 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC) 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 Front Panel 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALviiAug 2002Appendix A Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMR Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Serial Number Check List A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Shelf A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only) A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . PN Offset Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Usage B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Frequency - Korean Bands E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 MHz PCS Channels E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Set-up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALviii Aug 2002Prerequisites F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Setup - HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Setup - Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix H Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix I In-Service Calibration I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm up I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration Introduction I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8935 Power Delta Calibration I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Service Calibration I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Service Calibration Introduction I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix J GPIB Addresses J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Addresses J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address J-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 GPIB Address J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 GPIB Interface Box J-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address J-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALixAug 2002List of FiguresFigure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 Combiners 1-29. . . . . Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf 1-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout 1-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: Switch Card 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation??? 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A) 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest) 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935) 3-51. . . . . . Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935) 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A) 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A) 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxAug 2002Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz) G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz) G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465 G-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS I-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS I-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-1: HP437 Power Meter J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxiAug 2002Figure J-3: HP8935 Test Set J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B J-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-5: R3465 Communications Test Set J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box J-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure J-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address J-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxii Aug 2002List of TablesTable 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration 1-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: Sector Configurations 1-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: Pinging the Processors 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: Enable CSMs 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-16: Enable MCCs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment Setup 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-28: Cable Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxiiiAug 2002Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-64. . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss Value 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: Download BLO 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: Create CAL File 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Definition of Parameters 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAM 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame) 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy Test 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established) 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Enabling Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxiv Aug 2002Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-17: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-19: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-20: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIs 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-22: No MCC Channel Elements 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: Pre-power Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: Pre-power Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . . Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels) A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels) A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels) A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxvAug 2002Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter-frame Cabling C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands) E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-1: System Connectivity F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-3. . . . . . Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-1: Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-5: In-Service Calibration I-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses J-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address J-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxvi Aug 2002ForewordScope of manualThis manual is intended for use by cellular telephone systemcraftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular systemequipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of thisinformation has a general understanding of telephony, as used in theoperation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and isfamiliar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellularmobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is notexpected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internaloperation of the equipment.This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipmenttraining offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement orenhance the knowledge gained through such training.Text conventionsThe following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point outinformation that must be read. This information may be set-off from thesurrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.The three categories of these special paragraphs are:NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you canuse.Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid anundesirable situation or provides additional information tohelp you understand a topic or concept.CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipmentdamage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardoussituation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.
Foreword68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxviiAug 2002The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation ofsoftware information:SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type stylewithout angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used toname a command.SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and thesystem output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent thoseparts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown andtypewriter style characters represent command output responsesas displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriterstyle characters represent the command parameters.Changes to manualChanges that occur after the printing date are incorporated into yourmanual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in thismanual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options andprocedures become available for general use or when engineeringchanges occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should beretained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a listof all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.Receiving updatesTechnical Information Products and Services (TIPS) maintains acustomer database that reflects the type and number of manuals orderedor shipped since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Alsoidentified in this database is a “key” individual (such as DocumentationCoordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updatesfrom TIPS as they are released.To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it isimportant that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to theinformation in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),please contact Technical Information Products and Services.MOTOROLA, INC.Technical Information Products and ServicesPhone: Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . . Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435-5700. . FAX: +1-847-435-5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting manual errorsIn the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in yourmanual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure toinclude your name and address, the complete manual title and partnumber (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the pagenumber (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. Weappreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
Foreword 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxviii Aug 200224-hour support serviceIf you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of yourequipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center forimmediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:Arlington Heights, IL 800-433-5202. . . . . . . . . . Arlington Heights, International +1-847-632-5390. . Cork, Ireland 44-1793-565444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swindon, England 44-1793-565444. . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Requirements68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxixAug 2002FCC RequirementsContentThis section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for theSCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base TransceiverStations.FCC Part 15 RequirementsPart 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation.Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USERCAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorolacould void your authority to operate the equipment.15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with thelimits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of theFCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference in a residentialinstallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be determined by turning the equipmentOFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following measures:- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different fromthat to which the receiver is connected.- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician forhelp.
FCC Requirements 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxx Aug 2002FCC Part 68 RequirementsThis equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visiblewith the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for thisequipment in the format < US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>. If requested,this information must be provided to the telephone company.FCC Part 68 Registered DevicesDevice FCC Part 68 IDGroup Line Interface (GLI3) * US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1XCisco Model 1900-27 US: 5B1DDNDN0006ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA-31217-DE-N* NOTE: The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US:IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with one orboth of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered CSUdevice not listed above.The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. Ifthis happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so thatyou can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterruptedservice.If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephonecompany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance ofservice may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephonecompany will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advisedof your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it isnecessary.If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, pleasecontact:Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436NArlington Heights, Illinois 60004Phone Number: (847) 632-5390for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repairthis equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer oruser-serviceable parts.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola couldvoid your authority to operate this equipment.
General Safety68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxxiAug 2002General SafetyRemember! . . . Safetydepends on you!!The following general safety precautions must be observed during allphases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described inthis manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangersof which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should followthese warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safeoperation of the equipment in your operating environment.Ground the instrumentTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must beconnected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with athree-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either pluggedinto an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with athree-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contactadapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to anelectrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack andmating plug of the power cable must meet International ElectrotechnicalCommission (IEC) safety standards.Do not operate in an explosiveatmosphereDo not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases orfumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environmentconstitutes a definite safety hazard.Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must:Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized ServicePersonnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may removeequipment covers for internal subassembly, or componentreplacement, or any internal adjustment.Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certainconditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cableremoved.Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.Do not service or adjust aloneDo not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.Do not substitute parts ormodify equipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not installsubstitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensurethat safety features are maintained.
General Safety 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxxii Aug 2002Dangerous procedurewarningsWarnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerousprocedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in thewarnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safetyprecautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipmentin your operating environment.WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in thisequipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, andadjusting.
Revision History68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxxiiiAug 2002Revision HistoryManual Number68P09255A61-4Manual Title1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Version InformationThe following table lists the manual version, date of version, andremarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shownto the side) identify material which has changed from the previousrelease of this publication.VersionLevel Date of Issue Remarks1Mar 2002 DRAFT Manual submitted for engineering markup2Apr 2002 PRELIMINARY3Jul 2002 DV&V REVIEW4Aug 2002 PRELIMINARY: Incorporate comments from DV&V and engineering.
Patent Notification 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALxxiv Aug 2002Patent NotificationPatent numbersThis product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of thefollowing patents and other patents pending:4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 53013534193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 53013654237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 53032404268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 53032894282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 53034074301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 53054684302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 53070224312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 53075124350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 53094434354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 53095034367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 53111434369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 53111764369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 53115714369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 53134894375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 53197124485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 53217054491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 53217374517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 53233914519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 53253944549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 53275754550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 53295474564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 53296354573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 53393374581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D3373284590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D3422494591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D3422504616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D3470044636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D3496894644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE318144646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 52971614649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 52992284654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 53010564654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-1Chapter 1Introduction1
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-2Optimization Manual: Scope and LayoutScope of This DocumentThis document provides information pertaining to the optimization andaudit tests of Motorola SC 4812T Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear PowerAmplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.This document assumes the following prerequisites:SThe BTS frames and cabling have been installed per the BTS FrameInstallation manual, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SCseries equipment frames, and the SC 4812T CDMA BTS Installationmanual, which covers BTS specific cabling configurations.In most applications the same test procedure is used for all equipmentvariations. However, decision break points are provided throughout theprocedure when equipment specific tests are required.NOTE As the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) LocalMaintenance Facility (LMF) capability comes on-line,applicable LMF based procedures will be incorporated.Eventually, only the CDMA LMF platform will be supported asthe recommended customer method of interfacing with andservicing the SC series BTS equipment.We at Motorola Technical Education & Documentation have strived toincorporate into this document the many suggestions and inputs receivedfrom you, the customer, since the inception of the SC product line. Atthe same time, we have tried to insure that the scope of the documenttargets both the novice and expert site technician and engineer withthe information required to successfully perform the task at hand. Ifin some areas, the manual seems to cover the test in too much detail (ornot enough detail) we hope you will keep this in mind.1
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-3Document CompositionThis document covers the following major areas.SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (suchas component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to beconsidered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before optimizationor tests are performed.SPreliminary Operations, consisting of pre-power up tests, jumperconfiguration of BTS sub-assemblies, and initial application of powerto the BTS equipment frames. Download of all BTS processor boards,and LPAs.SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of downloading all BTSprocessor boards, LPA verification, radio frequency (RF) pathverification, Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration, and RadioFrequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) functions and calibrationSAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATPscripts executed by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit(TX) and receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTSequipment. Also generates an ATP report.SOptional manual performance tests used to verify specific areas of siteoperation or to verify regulation compliance. These tests are typicallyused to isolate faults down to the module level and informationnecessary to better understand equipment operation.SSite turnover after ATP is completed.SAppendices that contain pertinent data sheets that are filled outmanually by the CFE at the site, Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offsetinformation, an optimization/ATP matrix , output power data tables,CDMA operating frequency programming information, manual testsetup information, procedures for verifying that the Voltage StandingWave Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fallwithin acceptable limits, procedures for downloading ROM and RAMcode, and procedures for performing in-service ATP.1
Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-4CDMA LMF Product DescriptionThe CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LMF. Thisproduct is specifically designed to provide cellular communications fieldpersonnel the vehicle to support the following CDMA BTS operations:SInstallationSMaintenanceSCalibrationSOptimizationGraphical User Interface OverviewThe LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:SSelect the device or devices.SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the actiontaking place and other status information.SThe status report window indicates when the action is complete anddisplays other pertinent information.SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.Command Line Interface OverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Refer to the LMF CLI Commands, R15.x manual for a completeexplanation of the CLI commands and their use.Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in the CDMA LMF by clicking onHelp from the menu bar.1
Purpose of the Optimization68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-5Purpose of the OptimizationWhy Optimize?Proper optimization and calibration assures:SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.What Is Optimization?Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normalequipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexerassemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of theBTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that thecombined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics andbuilt-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causingimproper site operation.Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive andtransmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.SThe RX path for the starter frame starts at the ancillary equipmentframe RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through theancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antennafeedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the frame,through the bandpass filter, Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card,Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry,ending at a CDMA Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane BroadBand Transceiver (BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.NOTE In this manual, all version of the BBX, MCC, and GLI usable inthis BTS are generically identified as BBX, MCC, or GLI unlessotherwise specified.SThe RX path for the expansion frame starts at the ancillary equipmentframe RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through theancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antennafeedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the starterframe, through the bandpass filter and CIO card, out the expansionport at the top of the starter frame, through the expansion cable to theexpansion port on the expansion frame, through the ExpansionMulticoupler Preselector Card (EMPC) and CIO, ending at a BBX slotin the C-CCP shelf.SThe TX path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the top of theRFDS TX directional coupler antenna feedline port (CDMA), installedon the ancillary equipment frame. If the RFDS option is added, thenthe TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directionalcoupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipmentframe. The TX paths are identical for the starter and expansionframes.These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leavingonly site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristicsto be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective RadiatedPower (ERP) output power requirements.1
Purpose of the Optimization 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-6Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TXantenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports.) A single value is generatedfor each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that wouldoccur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss ofeach element in the path.When to OptimizeNew InstallationsAfter the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation. Thispreparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power-up,download of operating code, and Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)verification.Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performanceverification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, anddownload of accumulated calibration data.After optimization, a series of manual pre-ATP verification tests arecovered that address alarm/redundancy tests.After manual pre-Acceptance Test Procedure (pre-ATP) verificationtests, a series of manual ATP CDMA verification tests are covered usingthe actual equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site canbe placed in service.Site ExpansionOptimization is required after expansion of a site.Periodic OptimizationPeriodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on therequirements of the overall system.Repaired SitesRefer to Appendix C for detailed basic guideline tables and detailedOptimization/ATP Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must beperformed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it isreplaced.1
Abbreviations and Acronyms68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-7Abbreviations and AcronymsTable 1-1 identifies the equipment related abbreviations and acronymsused in this manual.Table 1-1: Abbreviations and AcronymsAcronym DefinitionAMR Alarm Monitor ReportingATP Acceptance Test ProcedureBBX Broadband TransceiverBBX2 Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supportsIS-95A/BBBX-1X Broadband Transceiver, 3rd Generation supportsIS-95A/B and cdma2000 1XBLO Bay Level OffsetBTS Base Transceiver SubsystemCBSC Centralized Base Station ControllerCCD CDMA Clock DistributionCDMA Code Division Multiple AccessCE Channel ElementCHI Concentration Highway InterfaceCIO Combiner Input/OutputCLI Command Line InterfaceCM Channel ModuleCNEOMI Common Network Element Operation andMaintenance InterfaceCSM Clock Synchronization ManagerCSM-I Clock Synchronization Manager, 1st GenerationCSM card hardware versionCSM-II Clock Synchronization Manager, 2nd GenerationCSM card hardware versionDRDC Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional CouplerEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceEMPC Expansion Multicoupler Preselector CardFRU Field Replaceable UnitGLI Group Line Interface,GLI2 Group Line Interface, 2nd Generation cardhardware versionGLI3 Group Line Interface, 3rd Generation cardhardware version for packet backhaulGPS Global Positioning SystemHSO High Stability OscillatorHSOX High Stability Oscillator ExpansionI&Q In-phase and Quadrature. . . continued on next page1
Abbreviations and Acronyms 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-8Table 1-1: Abbreviations and AcronymsAcronym DefinitionISB Inter Shelf BusLFR Low Frequency ReceiverLMF Local Maintenance FacilityLORAN LOng RAnge NavigationalLPA Linear Power AmplifierMCC Multi-Channel CDMAMCC8E/24E Multi-Channel CDMA, 8/24 Channels; 2ndGeneration supports IS-95A/BMCC1X-16/48 Multi-Channel CDMA, 16/48 Channels; 3rdGeneration supports IS-95A/B and cdma20001XMGLI Master Group Line InterfaceMM Mobility ManagerMMI Man Machine InterfaceMPC Multicoupler Preselector CardMSC Mobile Switching CenterOMCR Operations Maintenance Center - RadioPDA Power Distribution AssemblyPN Pseudo-random NoiseRF Radio FrequencyRGD Remote GPS DistributionRGPS Remote GPSRSSI Received Signal Strength IndicatorSBPF Single Bandpass FilterSCAP SC (Super Cell) Application ProtocolSNMP Simple Network Management ProtocolSTRAU SC (Super Cell) Transcoder/Rate Adaption UnitSU Subscriber UnitTCH Traffic ChannelTRDC Transmit Receive filter/Directional CouplerTSI Time Slot InterchangerUTC Universal Time Coordinates 1
Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-9Required Test EquipmentPolicyThe LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended testequipment and is part of a “calibrated test set”. To ensure consistent,reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended testequipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTSequipment.NOTE During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute testequipment with other test equipment models not supported bythe LMF, but those models must meet the same technicalspecifications.The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurementvariances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introducedas a result of test equipment substitutions. Before beginningoptimization or troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipmentneeded is on hand and operating properly.Test Equipment CalibrationOptimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipmentservice, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommendedmaintenance and calibration schedules closely.Test Cable CalibrationEquipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorolarecommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the testcables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion losswithin the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cableinsertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMFduring the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate testcable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with thecharacterization information prior to field optimization.Equipment Warm-upAfter arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in andturned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long aspossible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up fora minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDScalibration procedures.SCommunications Test SetSRubidium Time BaseSPower Meter1
Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-10Test Equipment SpecificationsTest equipment specification requirements for the test equipment (orconfiguration of test equipment) used to make up the general testequipment (DVM, etc) are given in the following paragraphs.LMF Hardware RequirementsMotorola recommends an LMF computer platform that meets thefollowing requirements:SNotebook computerS266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processorSWindows 98SE or Windows 2000 operating systemS128 MB RAM for Windows 98SE; 256 MB RAM for Windows 2000S4 GB internal hard disk driveSCD ROM driveS3 1/2 inch floppy driveSColor display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability todisplay more than 256 colorsSSerial port (COM 1)SParallel port (LPT 1)SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapterTest Equipment ListThe following pieces of test equipment are required during theoptimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers andframe keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manualon all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand theirindividual operation prior to use in optimization.NOTE Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation fordetailed operating instructions.Ethernet LAN TransceiverSPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter: 3COM Model -Etherlink III 3C589B1
Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-1110BaseT/10Base2 ConverterSTransition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2Converter- or -STransition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2ConverterNOTE Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used tointerface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.3C-PC-COMBO CBLSConnects to the 3COM PCMCIA card and eliminates the need for a10BaseT/10base2 Converter.RS-232 to GPIB InterfaceSNational Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04XRS232 serial null modem cable or equivalent; used to interface theLMF to the test equipment.SStandard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications(see Figure 1-1):- This solution passes only the 3 minimum electrical connectionsbetween the LMF and the General Purpose Information Bus (GPIB)interface. The control signals are jumpered as enabled on both endsof the RS-232 cable (9-pin D). TX and RX signals are crossed asNull Modem effect. Pin 5 is the ground reference.- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together oneach connector.Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail53278146GNDRXTXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRGNDTXRXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRON BOTH CONNECTORSSHORT PINS 7, 8;SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 69-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE52378146 DSR DSRFW00362Man Machine Interface (MMI) Interface Kit (Motorola partnumber CGDSMMICABLE219112)This cable is used to connect the LMF to the BTS.1
Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-12Communications System AnalyzerThe communication system analyzer is used during optimization andtesting of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment andprovides the following functions:(1) Frequency counter(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)(3) RF Signal Generator (capable of CDMA modulation)(4) Spectrum Analyzer(5) CDMA Code Domain analyzerThe following communication system analyzers are currently supportedby the LMF:SHP8921A/600 Analyzer - including 83203B CDMA Interface,manual control system card, and 83236A/B Personal communicationInterface (PCS) Interface for 1700/1900 MHz BTS.SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer - including R3561L Test Source UnitSCyberTest Communication AnalyzerSHewlett-Packard HP 8935 - with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX andwith Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FERSAdvantest R3267 Analyzer - including R3562 Test Source UnitSAgilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432B Test Source UnitGPIB CablesSHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) longused to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.Power MeterOne of the following power meters is required with the HP8921 andAdvantest analyzers:SHewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensorSGigatronics 8541C with model 80601A power sensorTiming Reference CablesSTwo BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3.05 m (10 ft.) long.Used to connect the communications analyzer to the front timingreference of the CSM cards in the BTS frame.Digital MultimeterSFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used forprecision dc and ac measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.1
Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-13Directional CouplerSNarda Model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01)1900 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-Mloads, or equivalent.SNarda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01 )800 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads,or equivalent.RF AttenuatorS20 dB fixed attenuator, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with 1.7/1.9 GHztest cable calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.RF Terminations/LoadsSAt least three 100-Watt (or larger) non-radiating RFterminations/loads.Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etcSAs required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and forvarious test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (typeN) for calibration and one RF short, two N-Type Female-to-FemaleAdapters.LAN CableSBNC-to BNC 50 ohm coaxial cable [.91 m (3 ft) maximum] with anF-to-F adapter, used to connect the 10BaseT-to-coaxial adapter tothe BTS LAN connector.High-impedance Conductive Wrist StrapSMotorola Model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage fromElectrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working withmodules.Optional EquipmentNOTE Not all optional equipment specified here will be supported bythe LMF in automated tests or when executing various measuretype command line interface (CLI) commands. It is meant toserve as a list of additional equipment that might be requiredduring maintenance and troubleshooting operations.Frequency CounterSStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If directmeasurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.Spectrum AnalyzerSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) orequivalent; required for manual tests.Local Area Network (LAN) TesterSModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used tosupplement LAN tests using the ohmmeter.1
Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-14Span Line (T1/E1) Verification EquipmentSAs required for local applicationOscilloscopeSTektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.2-way SplitterSMini-Circuits Model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provides thediversity receive input to the BTSHigh Stability 10 MHz Rubidium StandardSStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent - required for CSMand Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)frequency verification.Itasca Alarms Test BoxSItasca CGDSCMIS00014 - This test box may be used as a tool toassist in the testing of customer alarms.1
Required Documentation68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-15Required DocumentationRequired DocumentsThe following documents are required to perform optimization of thecell site equipment:SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), whichincludes:- General Site Information- Floor Plan- RF Power Levels- Frequency Plan (includes Site PN and Operating Frequencies)- Channel Allocation (Paging, Traffic, etc.)- Board Placement- Site Wiring List- CDF files (bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf)SBTS Frame Installation Manual; 68P09226A18S1X SC 4812T BTS Hardware Installation; 68P09255A60SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide, 68P64113A37SLMF CLI Commands, R16, 68P09253A56SEquipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipmentIntended Reader ProfileThe information in this manual set is intended for use by the cellularcommunications craftsperson(s) in the initial installation andconfiguration, as well as the day-to-day operation and maintenance of aBTS.The user of this information has a general understanding of telephony, asused in the operation of the Public Switched TelephoneNetwork (PSTN), and is familiar with these concepts as they are appliedin the cellular and maintenance mobile/portable radiotelephoneenvironment.The user also needs a working knowledge of the computer platformoperating system being used (Windows 98 or Windows 2000).1
BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-16BTS Equipment IdentificationEquipment OverviewThe Motorola SC 4812T BTS can consist of the following equipmentframes:SAt least one BTS starter frame- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-2)- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-3)SAncillary equipment frame (or wall mounted equipment)SExpansion frames- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-4)- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-5)Ancillary Equipment Frame IdentificationNOTE Equipment listed below can be wall mounted or mounted in astandard 19 inch frame. The description assumes that allequipment is mounted in a frame for clarity.If equipped with the RFDS option, the RFDS and directional couplersare the interface between the site antennas and the BTS or Modemframe. The RFDS equipment includes:SDirectional couplersSSite receive bandpass/bandreject filtersSRFDSLogical BTSThe BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, allBTS frames co-located at a single site had to be identified in thenetwork with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTSfeature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with uniqueFrame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to fourSC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logicalBTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up thelogical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF file that includes equipageinformation for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices and aCBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTS fames.1
BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-17Logical BTS NumberingThe first frame of a logical BTS has a -1 suffix (e.g., BTS-812-1 ).Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, -101 , -201 ,and -301 (e. g. BTS-812-201 ). When you log into a BTS, a FRAMEtab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME-282-1 ) for BTS-282. If a logicalBTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for eachframe (e.g. FRAME-438-1 , FRAME-438-101 , and FRAME-438-201for a BTS-438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in theCDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS-438-1) is displayed.Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one ormore frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen forinformation on how to select devices.C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID NumbersAll cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to asingle BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbersdependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer toTable 1-2 and Table 1-3 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#Power(PS-1) Power(PS-2) Power(PS-3) AMR-1 GLI2-1 MCC BBX BBX-RMPC/EMPC-11 - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 -101 ---101 101 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 103 104 105 106 R101 -201 ---201 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 201 202 203 204 205 206 R201 -301 ---301 301 301 302 303 304 305 306 301 302 303 304 305 306 R301 -Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#HSO/LFR CSM-1 CSM-2 CCDACCDBAMR-2 GLI2-2MCC BBX SW MPC/EMPC-21 - 1 2 - - - 2 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 - -101 -101 102 - - - 102 102 107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 - -201 -201 202 - - - 202 102 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 - -301 -301 302 - - - 302 102 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312 - -1
BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-18Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter FrameExpansion I/OHousingFor clarity, doors are not shown.Front CosmeticPanelPower InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/ORX In (1A - 6Aand 1B - 6B)Exhaust RegionC-CCP CageBreakersCombinerSectionRGD (Needed forExpansion only)LPA Cageti-CDMA-WP-00098-v01-ildoc-ftw1
BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-19Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter FrameExpansion I/OHousingFor clarity, doors are not shown.Front CosmeticPanelPower InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/ORX In (1A - 6Aand 1B - 6B)Exhaust RegionC-CCP Cage-48VdcPower SupplyBreakersCombinerSectionRGD (Needed forExpansion only)LPA CagePowerConversionShelfBreakersAlarmsti-CDMA-WP-00097-v01-ildoc-ftw1
BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-20Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion FramePower InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/OExpansion Portto another BTSExhaust RegionC-CCP CageBreakersLPA CageFor clarity, doors are not shown.LANti-CDMA-WP-00110-v01-ildoc-ftwCombinerSection1
BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-21Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion FrameExpansion Portto another BTSFor clarity, doors are not shown.Power InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/OExhaust RegionC-CCP CageBreakersCombinerSectionLPA CagePowerConversionShelfLANBreakersAlarmsti-CDMA-WP-00109-v01-ildoc-ftw1
BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-22BTS Frame DescriptionThe BTS is the interface between the span lines to/from the Cellsite BaseStation Controller (CBSC) and the site antennas. This frame is describedin three sections:SThe top interconnect plate where all connections are made.SThe upper portion of the frame which houses circuit breakers, coolingfans, and the C-CCP shelf.SThe lower portion of the frame which houses the LPA fans, LPAs, andTX filter/combiners.SThe -48 V version of the BTS also has a section below the LPAscontaining a power conversion shelf that supplies power to the LPAs.Use the illustrations that follow to visually identify the majorcomponents, that make up the Motorola SC 4812T BTS frame.Top Interconnect Plate (see Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7)All cabling to and from the BTS equipment frames is via theinterconnect panel on the top of each frame. Connections made hereinclude:SSpan linesSRX antennasSTX antennaSAlarm connectionsSPower inputSLAN connectionsSGPS input or Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) on the SiteI/O BoardSRemote Global Positioning System Distribution (RGD)SLORAN-C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) inputSExpansion frame connectionSGround connectionsSRJ-45 Pass-through ConnectorsC-CCP Shelf (see Figure 1-10)SC-CCP backplane and cageSPower supply modulesSCDMA clock distribution (CCD) boardsSCSM and HSO/LFR boardsSAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) boardsSGLI cards (may be GLI2 or GLI3)SMPC/EMPC boards- MPC - starter frame only- EMPC - expansion framesSSwitch cardSMCC boards (may be MCC8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)SBBX boards (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)SCIO boards1
BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-23PA Shelves (see Figure 1-11 or Figure 1-12)SLPA cagesSLPA trunking backplanesSSingle Tone Linear Power Amplifier (STLPA, or more commonlyreferred to as “LPA”) modulesSLPA fan modulesSLPA Combiner Cage (+27 V BTS)STX filter combiners or bandpass filters-48 V Power Conversion Shelf (see Figure 1-15)SPower conversion backplane and shelfSPower conversion boardsSPower conversion alarm cardSFan modulesSPower distribution assemblySAir plenum1
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-24Frame Module Location & IdentificationFigure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANGPSABABSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFR/ALARM B 43A2A1A6A5A4A3B2B1B6B5B4BGND56123TX OUTFRONTREARSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDCHSORXALARM AEXP I/ORGDti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftwLOW FREQUENCYRECEIVER / HSOSPAN I/ORF EXPANSION PORT(TO ANOTHER BTS)TRANSMITANTENNACONNECTORSPOWER INPUTRECEIVE ANTENNACONNECTORSSITE I/OSPAN I/OGPS IN LAN CONNECTIONSALARMCONNECTORSBPR-TO-GLIINTERCONNECT PANEL(OPTIONAL)1
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-25Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANGPSABABSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFRALARM B 43A2A1A6A5A4A3B2B1B6B5B4BGND56123TX OUTSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDCHSO/RXALARM AEXP I/ORGDHSO/LFRFRONTREARSPAN I/ORF EXPANSIONPORT (TOANOTHER BTS)TRANSMITANTENNACONNECTORSPOWER INPUTRECEIVE ANTENNACONNECTORSSITE I/OSPAN I/OSITE I/OALARMCONNECTORSRX321123ABLANCONNECTIONSGPS INti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftwBPR-TO-GLIINTERCONNECT PANEL(OPTIONAL)1
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-26Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANABABGPSEXP INSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFR/ALARM B4GND56123TX OUTFRONTREARSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BABCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDCHSOEXP OUTABALARM AEXP INHOUSINGTRANSMITANTENNACONNECTORSEXP OUTHOUSING (ADDEDONLY WHENUSING SECONDEXPANSIONFRAME)SITE I/O LFR/HSORGDPOWERINPUTLANSPAN I/O SPAN I/Oti-CDMA-WP-00102-v01-ildoc-ftwRJ-45 PASS-THROUGHCONNECTORS1
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-27Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANABABGPSEXP INSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFRALARM B4GND56123TX OUTFRONTREARSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BABCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSHSO/EXP OUTABALARM AEXP INHOUSINGTRANSMITANTENNACONNECTORSEXP OUTHOUSING (ADDEDONLY WHENUSING SECONDEXPANSIONFRAME)SITE I/ORGDPOWERINPUTLANSPAN I/O SPAN I/O123123LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDCSITE I/OHSO/LFRRF FILTER PORTS NOT USEDIN EXPANSION FRAMEti-CDMA-WP-00100-v01-ildoc-ftwRJ-45 PASS-THROUGHCONNECTORS1
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-28Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf19 mm Filler PanelPS-3AMR-1CSM-1CSM-238 mm Filler PanelAMR-2GLI-1GLI-2MCC-6BBX-1BBX-2BBX-3BBX-4BBX-5BBX-6BBX-RSwitchMPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2CIOBBX-7BBX-8BBX-9BBX-10BBX-1 1BBX-12MCC-5MCC-4MCC-3MCC-2MCC-1MCC-12MCC-11MCC-10MCC-9MCC-8MCC-7PS-2PS-1CCD-2 CCD-1NOTE: MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s, orMCC-1Xs. BBXs maybe BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.GLIs may be GLI2s orGLI3s.HSO/LFRFW00295REF1
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-29Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 CombinersLPA1ALPA1BLPA1CLPA1DLPA3ALPA3BLPA3CLPA3DLPA2ALPA2BLPA2CLPA2DLPA4ALPA4BLPA4CLPA4DFANMODULE(TYPICAL)FILTERS /COMBINERS(2 TO 1 COMBINERSHOWN)NoteNo adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filtercombiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” isdefined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart(center-to-center).1234564-CARRIER CONFIGURATIONCARRIER13CARRIER24123456FW002961
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-30Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 CombinersLPA1ALPA1BNoteNo adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filtercombiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” isdefined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart(center-to-center).4-CARRIER CONFIGURATIONCARRIER CARRIERLPA1CLPA1DLPA3CLPA3DLPA2ALPA2BLPA2CLPA2DLPA4CLPA4DFW00481123456123 4123456LPA3ALPA3BLPA4ALPA4BFANMODULE(TYPICAL)FILTERS /COMBINERS(2 TO 1 COMBINERSHOWN)-48 VoltSC 4812T1
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-31Sector ConfigurationThere are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater thantwo, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending onsectorization and channel sequencing.Table 1-4: BTS Sector ConfigurationNumberof carriers Numberof sectors Channelspacing Filter requirements13 or 6 N/A Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner(2:1 or 4:1)2 6 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)2 6 Adjacent Not supported in single frame2 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter3,4 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)3,4 3 Adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)1
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-32NOTE In Table 1-5, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.Table 1-5: Sector ConfigurationsConfig Ref. No. Description3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavitycombiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6total).1TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 26-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavitycombiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.2TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 BBX-10 BBX-1 1 BBX-12 23-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavitycombiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.3TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 23-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combinersfor 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#4BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 3N/A N/A N/A BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 43-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.5TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 23-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#6BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 N/A N/A N/A 3BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 N/A N/A N/A 46-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavitycombiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.7TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 11
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-33Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/FiltersNumbering456LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DLPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2ALPA 4BLPA 4ALPA 4CLPA 4DSector3 SectorSector3 Sector(6 Sector)Numbering2 to 1 Combiner3 Sector or 6 SectorC1, S1-3(C1, S1-3) C2, S1-3(C2, S1-3)C3, S1-3(C1, S4-6) C4, S1-3(C2, S4-6)(6 Sector)123456LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DLPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2ALPA 4BLPA 4ALPA 4CLPA 4DSectorNumbering SectorNumbering4 to 1 Combiner3 SectorC1, S1-3 C2, S1-3C3, S1-3 C4, S1-3123LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1D LPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2ASector3 SectorNumbering Sector3 SectorNumberingDual Bandpass Filter3 Sector OnlyC1, S1-3 C2, S1-3123456LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DSectorNumbering Dual Bandpass Filter6 SectorC1, S1-3C1, S4-62 Carrier Maximum 1 Carrier Only6 Sector123Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 6.Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 7.FW002971
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-34Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/FiltersNote: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 6.Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-5 ConfigurationReference Number 7.REF FW00482415236NumberingSector3 SectorSector3 Sector(6 Sector)Numbering2 to 1 Combiner3 Sector or 6 SectorC1, S1-3(C1, S1-3) C2, S1-3(C2, S1-3)C3, S1-3(C1, S4-6) C4, S1-3(C2, S4-6)(6 Sector)LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DLPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2ALPA 4BLPA 4ALPA 4CLPA 4DSectorNumbering SectorNumbering4 to 1 Combiner3 SectorC1, S1-3 C2, S1-3C3, S1-3 C4, S1-3LPA 1ALPA 1B 13LPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DLPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2ALPA 4BLPA 4ALPA 4CLPA 4D2LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1D LPA 2DLPA 2CLPA 2BLPA 2A45Sector3 SectorNumbering Sector3 SectorNumberingDual Bandpass Filter3 Sector OnlyC1, S1-3 C2, S1-32 Carrier Maximum21361524LPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3CLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3DSectorNumberingDual Bandpass Filter6 SectorC1, S1-3C1, S4-61 Carrier Only6 Sector3 Sector3 Sector361
Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-35Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion ShelfFW00501PS-6AMRPS-5PS-4PS-9PS-8PS-71C1A2A2C3C3A4A4CLPA1D1B2B2D3D3B4B4D3030303030303030FANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONT1
Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL1-36Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS LayoutAMR-B(RS-485 SERIAL)AMR-A(RS-485 SERIAL)Cobra RFDS external housing(Shown With Cover off)POWER SUPPLYON/OFF ROCKERSWITCHMMI PORT ANDPWR/ALARM LEDCobra RFDS Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)(shown removed from external housing)CHASSIS GNDPOWERCONNECTORCobra RFDS RF connectorpanel detail(shown from rear)ELECTRICAL GNDFRONT VIEWCASU 1CASU 2FWTICSUA ESN LABEL(FOR SC XXXX SERIES BTS)MMILEDSESN LABEL(FOR SC 6XX SERIES BTS)FW001381
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-1Chapter 2Preliminary Operations2
Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-2Preliminary Operations: OverviewIntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifyingmodule placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switchsettings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTSapplication. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented.Cell Site TypesSites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectoredwith a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimizedaccordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, pleaserefer to the BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation manual.CDFThe Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage datainformation and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. Thenumber of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCC boards(per cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of theequipage data included in the CDF.NOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files are usedfor the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided forthe BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files cancause system errors. Failure to use the correct CDF files to loginto a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.Site Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame andancillary equipment frame.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductivesurface or back into the anti-static shipping bag.2
Preliminary Operations: Overview68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-3Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesFollow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation ofboards/modules.Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves asrequired. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.NOTEOn 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the siteconfiguration (see Figure 2-1).2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.Figure 2-1: Switch CardSwitch Card1234ONBTSMF3 Sector6 SectorJ1J2J3J4J5SHIELDSConfigurationSwitchNOTE:CONFIGURATION SWITCH ON800 MHZ SWITCH CARD ONLY.SHOWN FOR 3 SECTOR BTS.SWITCH 1 CHOOSES BTS OR MF.SWITCH 4 CHOOSES 3-SECTOR OR6 SECTOR. SWITCHES 2 & 3 ARE NOTUSED.FW003792
Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-4Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration SwitchThe backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breakerpanel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T19 mm Filter PanelPower SupplyAMR / MACHHSOCSMCSM39 mm Filter PanelAMR / MACHGLI2GLI2MCC-6BBX-1BBX-2BBX-3BBX-4BBX-5BBX-6BBX-RSwitchMPCMPCCIOBBX-7BBX-8BBX-9BBX-10BBX-1 1BBX-12MCC-5MCC-4MCC-3MCC-2MCC-1MCC-12MCC-11MCC-10MCC-9MCC-8MCC-7Power SupplyPower SupplyCCD CCDFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTONOFFSC 4812T C-CCP SHELFFAN MODULEREMOVEDSTARTERFRAMESETTINGONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 1SETTINGONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 2SETTINGBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0BOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0BOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0FW00151REF2
Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-5Pre-Power-up TestsObjectiveThis procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies theoperation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units priorto applying power for the first time.Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to complete the pre-power-uptests:SDigital Multimeter (DMM)CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling the any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.Cabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling - up to six TX cablesSGPSSLFRNOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.For negative power applications (-48 V):SThe negative power cable is red or blue.SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.2
Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-6DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure inTable 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for +27 Vsystems or to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for -48 V systems to verifythere are no shorts in the BTS frame DC distribution system.Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Step Action1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.2On each frame:SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, butleave them in their associated slots.SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeledC-CCP 1, 2, 3 on the +27 V BTS C-CCP power distribution panel and labeled POWER1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 on the -48 V C-CCP power distribution panel).SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1Bthrough 4C-4D - located on the C-CCP power distribution panel in the +27 V BTS or on thepower conversion shelf power distribution panel in the -48 V BTS).3Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal onthe top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by thebreaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (ormissing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).4Set the C-CCP (POWER) breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. RepeatStep 3 after turning on each breaker.NOTENOTEIf the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in thatboard/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate theproblem before proceeding.5Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C-CCP shelf and into their associated slots oneat a time. Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finallyindicating approximately 500 Ω.! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:- (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)- (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)STPN4045APWR CONV CDMA RCVRSTPN4009PWR CONV CDMA RCVR6Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.Repeat Step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, stoppingat approximately 500 Ω..7Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time.Repeat Step 3 after turning on each breaker.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω... . . continued on next page2
Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-7Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Step Action8In the -48 V BTS, insert and lock the DC/DC LPA converter modules into their associated slots one ata time.Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finallyindicating approximately 500 Ω.! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:- (in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)STPN4044APWR CONV LPA9Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.Repeat Step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω.. 2
Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-8Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-testPOWER INPUTTOP OF FRAMEBREAKER PANELLPABREAKERSC-CCPBREAKERS4GND56123TX OUTCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDCLFR/HSOBreakering:S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered togetherS Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 amp breakers)S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminatedS Single feed for C-CCPS Dual feed for LPAFW002981D1B2B2D1C1A2A2C30303030303030303D3B4B4D3C3A4A4C505050123CCPLPAC . . . continued on next page2
Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-9Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter FrameExpansion I/OHousingFor clarity, doors are not shown. FW00214Front CosmeticPanelPower InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/ORX In (1A - 6Aand 1B - 6B)Exhaust RegionC-CCP CageBreakersCombinerSectionRGD (Needed forExpansion only)LPA Cage2
Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-10Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test41527638P9OWER304040304040304040POWER INPUTTOP OF FRAMEC-CCP BREAKERLPABREAKER4GND56123TX OUTCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDCLFRHSO/Breakering:S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered togetherS Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 A breakers)S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminatedS Single feed for C-CCPS Dual feed for LPAFW004831231231C1A2A2C3C3A4A4CLPA1D1B2B2D3D3B4B4D30303030303030302
Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-11Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter FrameFW00477Expansion I/OHousingFor clarity, doors are not shown.Front CosmeticPanelPower InputConnectionTX Out (1 - 6)Span I/O BSpan I/O ASite I/ORX In (1A - 6Aand 1B - 6B)Exhaust RegionC-CCP CageBreakersCombinerSectionRGD (Needed forExpansion only)LPA CagePowerConversionShelfBreakersAlarms 2
Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-12DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)Before applying power to the RFDS, follow the steps in Table 2-3, whilereferring to Figure 2-7, to verify there are no shorts in the RFDS DCdistribution system, backplanes, or modules/boards. As of the date ofthis publication, the RFDS is not used with the -48 V BTS.NOTE Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each framevs. site documentation must be completed, as covered inTable 2-1 on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)Step Action1Physically verify that all DC/DC converters supplying the RFDS are OFF or disabled.2Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the OFF position (see Figure 2-7).3Verify the initial resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminal with respect to ground terminalmeasures > 5 kΩ , then slowly begins to increase.SIf the initial reading is < 5 kΩ and remains constant, a short exists somewhere in the DCdistribution path supplied by the breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding.4Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the ON position.Repeat Step 3.Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail)NOTE:Set the input power switch ON while measuring theresistance from the DC power - with respect to thepower + terminal on the rear of the COBRA RFDS.INPUT POWERSWITCH (P1)FRONT OF COBRA RFDS(cut away view shown for clarity)RFDS REARINTERCONNECT PANEL“-” CONNECTORPIN“+” CONNECTORPINCONNECTOR (MADEUP OF A HOUSINGAND TWO PINS)FW001392
Initial Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-13Initial Power-up TestsPower-up ProceduresWARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to theBTS equipment. This test must be performed with a secondperson present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.DC Input PowerIn the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to eachBTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frameitself will be powered up and verified one at a time.Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and returncables are connected between the power supply breakers and the powerconnectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable positionreferring to Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 for +27 V systems and Figure 2-5on page 2-10 for -48 V systems.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installationof any card/module. After removal, the card/module should beplaced on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag inwhich it was shipped.NOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.For negative power applications (-48 V):SThe negative power cable is red or blue.SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect theframe to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlinedin Table 2-4.Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable GuidelinesMaximum Cable Length Wire Size30.38 m (100 ft) 107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)54.864 m (180 ft) 185 mm2 (350 kcmil)Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft) Not recommendedNOTE If Anderson SB350 style power connectors are used, make surethe connector adapters are securely attached to each of the BTSpower feeds and returns. Also, make sure the cables have beenproperly installed into each connector.2
Initial Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-14Common Power Supply VerificationThe procedure in Table 2-5 must be performed on any BTS frameconnected to a common power supply at the site after the common powersupply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEMsuggested procedures.Perform the following steps to verify the power input is withinspecification before powering up the individual cards/modules with theframes themselves.Table 2-5: Common Power Supply VerificationStep Action1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.2On the RFDS (for +27 V systems only), set the input power switch P1 to the OFF position (seeFigure 2-7).3On each frame:SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, butleave them in their associated slots.SSet breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C-CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 onpage 2-8 or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for breaker panel layout if required).- C-CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP-1 , 2, 3 in the +27 V BTS and labeled POWER1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 in the -48 V BTS.- LPA breakers are labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D.4Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame (+27 Vdc or-48 Vdc).5Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply thatsupplies the frame to the ON position.6After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages atthe top of each BTS frame are within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.2
Initial Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-15Initial Power-up (RFDS)The procedure in Table 2-6 must be performed on the RFDS after inputpower from the common power supply has been verified. Perform thefollowing steps to apply initial power to the cards/modules within theframe itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.NOTE Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each framevs. site documentation must be completed, as covered inTable 2-1, on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS)Step Action1On the RFDS, set the input power rocker switch (P1) to the ON position (see Figure 2-7).2Verify power supply output voltages (at the top of BTS frame), using a digital voltmeter, are withinspecifications: +27.0 V nominal.Initial Power-up (BTS)The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power fromthe common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps inTable 2-7 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frameitself, verifying that each is operating within specification.Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)Step Action1At the BTS, set the C-CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 orFigure 2-5 on page 2-10) to the ON position by pushing in the breakers.2Insert the C-CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.3! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:- (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)- (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)- (in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)Insert and lock the converter/power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.•If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the userthat there is no load on the power supplies.- If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;if not, then a faulty converter/power supply module is indicated and should be replaced beforeproceeding.STPN 4045APWR CONV CDMA RCVRSTPN 4044APWR CONV LPASTPN4009PWR CONV CDMA RCVR4Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C-CCP shelf into their associated slots.5Seat the first equipped LPA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper LPA shelf including LPAfan.SIn +27 V systems, observe that the LPA internal fan comes on line.6Repeat step 5 for all remaining LPAs.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL2-16Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)Step Action7Set the LPA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN one at a time. SeeFigure 1-13 on page 1-33 or Figure 1-14 on page 1-34 for configurations and Figure 2-3 on page 2-8or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for LPA breaker panel layout.On +27 V frames, engage (push) LPA circuit breakers.SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.On -48 V frames, engage (push) LPA PS circuit breakers.SConfirm LPA PS fans start.SConfirm LEDs on -48 V power converter boards light.SConfirm LPA fans start.SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.8After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supplyoutput voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co-located frames (if equipped). 2
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-1Chapter 3Optimization/Calibration3
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-2Optimization/Calibration - IntroductionIntroductionThis section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the spanlines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operatingsoftware, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibrationof the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, usingthe RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contactsare functioning properly.NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for anyapplicable information.Optimization ProcessAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations(power up) have been completed, use the LMF to calibrate and optimizethe BTS. Motorola recommends that the optimization be accomplishedas follows:1. Download MGLI-1 with code and data and then enable MGLI-1.NOTE GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices ofthe following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,GLI, MCC, and TSU (if RFDS is installed). If a device is installedand powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in the BTSdisplay, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file mustbe corrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF.3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:- CSM- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)- GLI (other than MGLI-1)- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)4. Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):- Secondary CSM- Primary CSM- All MCCs7. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.8. Select the test equipment.9. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated using the CDMA LMF that will be used for theoptimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also beentered manually.3
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-310. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs, and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TXcalibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.12. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused thefailure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problemthat caused the failure and run the individual tests as required untilall TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.Site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.NOTE For more information on the differences in site types, pleaserefer to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installationand Functional Hardware Description manuals.Cell-Site Data FileThe Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines theBTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must beplaced in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to loginto that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using afloppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMFcomputer has that capability. The CDF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSC-CCP shelf allocation plan- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy- CSM equipage including redundancy- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) channel element allocationplan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, andhow the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channelelements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to12) MCCs in the shelf.SCSM equipage including redundancySEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) andantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX outputlevel required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector canalso be determined.3
Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-4NOTE Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additionalinformation on the layout of the LMF directory structure(including CDF file locations and formats).BTS System Software DownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correctbts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtainedfrom the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure touse the correct CDF files can cause wrong results. Failure to usethe correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) sitecan shut down the site.The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatteddiskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer hasftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMFHelp screen, for the procedure.Site Equipage VerificationIf you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, andreview the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage datain the CDF matches the actual site hardware using a CDF conversiontable.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installationof any card/module. After removal, the card/module should beplaced on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag inwhich it was shipped.3
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-5Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMFIsolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansNOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and placeit out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50-pin TELCOcable connected to the BTS frame site I/O board J1 connectoruntil the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!Each frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. TheSpan I/O J1 connector provides connection of 25 pairs of wire. A GLIcard can support up to six spans. In the SC 4812T configuration, the oddspans (1, 3, and 5) terminate on the Span “A” I/O; and the even spans (2,4, and 6) terminate on the Span “B” I/O.Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC mustdisable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control theCDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sendingcontrol information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests. Refer toFigure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 as required.Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1From the OMC/CBSC, disable the BTS and place it OOS. Refer to SC OMC-R/CBSC SystemOperator Procedures.- The T1/E1 span 50-pin TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame SPAN I/O board J1 connectorcan be removed from both Span I/O boards, if equipped, to isolate the spans.NOTEIf a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disconnecting thespan line.Verify that you remove the SPAN cable, not the “MODEM/TELCO” connector.Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation50-PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS-232 9-PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW002993
Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-6LMF to BTS ConnectionThe LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the leftside of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Accessdoor (see Figure 3-2).Table 3-2: LMF to BTS ConnectionStep Action1To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart theVelcro tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-2).2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshieldedtwisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DCtransformer).- If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B connector.- If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures.NOTE- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernetconnection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.! CAUTION- The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNCconnector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.Figure 3-2: LMF Connection DetailNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESSdoor. Pull apart Velcro tape andgain access to the LAN A or LANB LMF BNC connector.LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONSON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;ETHERNET “B” COVEREDWITH VELCRO TAPE)LMF COMPUTERTERMINAL WITHMOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNETADPATER & ETHERNETUTP ADAPTER10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO BNC T 115 VAC POWERCONNECTION FW00140UNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11CONNECTORS)3
Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-7Preparing the LMFOverviewSoftware and files for installation and updating of the LMF are providedon CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:SLMF Program on CD ROMSCDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)The following section provides information and instructions forinstalling and updating the LMF software and files.NOTE For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, the computerplatform must be configured to display more than 256 colors.See the operating system software instructions for verifying andconfiguring the display settings.CDMA LMF Home DirectoryThe CDMA LMF installation program creates the default homedirectory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories(folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMALMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF homedirectory is located<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMALMF is installed.”3
Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-8LMF Operating System InstallationFollow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.Table 3-3: LMF Operating System InstallationnStep Action1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.2Click on the Start button.3 Select Run.4In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.NOTEIf applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.5Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.NOTEFirst Time Installations:- Install U/WIN (First)- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)- Install LMF Software (Third)- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fourth)Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of theLMF modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Winover-writes these modifications.NOTEThere are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted,choose the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Performthe Device Images install after the WinLMF installation.If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates. Copy CDF Files from CBSCBefore the LMF can execute the optimization/ATP procedures for theBTS, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must beobtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMFnotebook. This requires copying the CBSC CDF files to a DOSformatted diskette, and using the diskette to install the CDF file in theLMF.Follow the procedure in Table 3-4 to obtain the CDF files from theCBSC and copy the files to a diskette. For any further information, referto the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide or the LMF Help screen.3
Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-9NOTE If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to copythe CDF files from the CBSC.On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be used inplace of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdfbts-248.cdf). This should be done using a copy of the CBSCCDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is not changed to DOSformat.When copying CDF files, comply with the following to preventBTS login problems with the LMF:- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdffilenames must correspond to the locally assigned numbersfor each BTS and its controlling CBSC.- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF workswith locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file doesnot provide a valid optimization unless the generic file isedited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers)with the operational parameters used locally.Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMFnStep ActionAT THE CBSC:1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject -q and press the <Enter> key.4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd <directory name> (ex. cdbts-248 ) and pressing <Enter>.6 Type ls <Enter> to display the list of files in the directory.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-10Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMFnActionStep7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdffiles on the diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS orWindows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDFfiles on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name).8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the <Enter> key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC.AT THE LMF:11 Start the Windows operating system.12 Insert the diskette into the LMF.13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the<lmf home directory>\cdma directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from theCBSC.14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files fromthe diskette to the corresponding <lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13. Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI ConnectionConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windowsoperating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can besaved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminalconnection. This eliminates the need for setting up connectionparameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedure in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.3
Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-11Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs>Accessories2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on theHyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window.- Click OK.4NOTEFor LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and aphysical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be usedfor the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win98), and click OK.5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File>Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File>Exit9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.10 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-12Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI ConnectionStep Action11 Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it(Win 98).13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the pop-up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop. Folder Structure OverviewThe LMF uses an <lmf home directory> folder that contains all of theessential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The list thatfollows outlines the folder structure for the LMF. Except for the bts-nnnfolders, these folders are created as part of the the LMF installation.Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description ofthe folder structure.Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)x:\<lmf home directory> foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS-nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts-nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts-163.)NOTE The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not availablefrom the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders maybe present as as a legacy from previous software versions ordownloaded from the CBSC/OMC-R.3
Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-13Pinging the ProcessorsFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. Figure 3-4 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN networkmodules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect DiagramCHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩINLMF CONNECTORBC-CCPCAGEABINABAOUTOUTBTS(EXPANSION)BC-CCPCAGEABINABAOUTBTS(MASTER)INOUTFW00141Follow the procedure in Table 3-6 and refer to Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6,as required, to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) andverify LAN redundancy is operating correctly.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.NOTE The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on eachframe/enclosure before performing this test. All other processorboard LAN connections are made via the backplanes.3
Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-14Table 3-6: Pinging the ProcessorsnStep Action1If you have not already done so, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-2 on page 3-6).2From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.3In the Open box, type ping and the <MGLI IP address> (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IPaddress for MGLI-2.4Click on the OK button.5If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.3
Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-15Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANGPSABABSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFR/ALARM B 43A2A1A6A5A4A3B2B1B6B5B4BGND56123TX OUTFRONTREARSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDCHSORXALARM AEXP I/ORGDti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftwETHERNET CONNECTORSWITH 50-OHM TERMINATORSBPR-TO-GLIINTERCONNECT PANEL(OPTIONAL)3
Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-16Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANGPSABABSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFRALARM B 43A2A1A6A5A4A3B2B1B6B5B4BGND56123TX OUTSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDCHSO/RXALARM AEXP I/ORGDFRONTREARSITE I/ORX321123ABti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftwETHERNET CONNECTORSWITH 50-OHM TERMINATORSBPR-TO-GLIINTERCONNECT PANEL(OPTIONAL)3
Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-17Using CDMA LMFBasic LMF OperationThe CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operatingenvironments, which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:SSelecting and deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusSSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide.Graphical User Interface OverviewThe LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:SSelect the device or devices.SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the actiontaking place and other status information.SThe status report window indicates when the the action is completeand displays other pertinent information.SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.3
Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-18Command Line Interface OverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcan not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time Due to architectural limitations, theGUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to usethe same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLIautomatically finds and uses an in-progress login session with a BTSinitiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI inthe same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running whenthe GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already runningwhen the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is alreadyrunning when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays thefollowing warning message:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure that you want to start the application?This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts theapplication. Selecting no terminates the application.CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command can be broken down in the following way:SverbSdevice including device identifier parametersSswitchSoption parameters consisting of:- keywords- equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values- parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx-<bts_id>-<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLIcommands and their usage.3
Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-19Logging into a BTSNOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used forthe BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for theBTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files canresult in invalid optimization. Failure to use the correct CDFfiles to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down thesite.Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTSand the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into more than one BTS at atime, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF isproperly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2).PrerequisitesBefore attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF operating system is correctly installed and prepared.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer isconnected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating systemand LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connectingit to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).BTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUIenvironment.Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedureStep Action1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMFis not running).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMFAre you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMAicon.. . . continued on next page3
Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-20Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedureStep Action4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP addressfor MGLI-2.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Click on Ping.- If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255- If there is no response the following is displayed:128.0.0.2:9216:Timed outIf the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B linkcables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.9Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normallyMPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.NOTEWhen performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment isconnected to the starter frame.10 Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.11 Click on Login.A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.NOTESIf you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices canbe seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen. 3
Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-21BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the CLIenvironment.NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to aBTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTSat the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environmentwill log out of it for both. When either a login or logout isperformed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication thatlogout has occurred.Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login ProcedureStep Action1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI sessionwill be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts-<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this isfirst login to this BTS).port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login tothis BTS).A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts-3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”3
Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-22Logging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and theCLI operating environments.NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to aBTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTSat the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environmentwill log out of it for both. When either a login or logout isperformed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication thatlogout has occurred.Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout ProcedureStep Action1Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pull-down menu.A Confirm Logout pop-up message appears.3Click on Yes or press the <Enter> key to confirm logout.You are returned to the Login tab.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as theGUI, a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.4If a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the BaseStation because the given BTS is not logged in, perform the following actions:- Click OK.- Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.- Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop-up.- Click Yes in the Logout Error pop-up which appears again.5If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the displayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menubar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear. 3
Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-23Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout ProcedureStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be donewith it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts-<bts#>A response similar to the following is displayed:LMF>12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted Command=logout bts-3312:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:exitA response similar to the following is displayed before the window closes:Killing background processes.... 3
Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-24Establishing an MMI Communication SessionFor those procedures that require MMI communications between theLMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to initiate thecommunication session.NOTE If the LMF GUI is running and the LMF is logged into a BTS,the LMF cannot initiate a hyperterminal session on the COMport normally used to communicate with the test equipment.Also, if the LMF has only one COM port, you cannot operatetest equipment and have a hyperterminal session running at thesame time.Table 3-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationsStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires theMMI communication session.2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its desktopshortcut.NOTEIf a desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Startmenu by selecting:Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal><Named HyperTerminal Connection(e.g., MMI Session).3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer <Enter> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8-PIN TO 10-PINRS-232 CABLE(P/N 30-09786R01)RS-232 CABLE8-PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW006873
Download the BTS68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-25Download the BTSDownload the BTS - OverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and datamust be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTScan be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the devicedoes not match the release level of the site operating software AND theCBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. Ifyou must download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROMcode loaded at the factory.RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctRAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAMcode can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selectedautomatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAMcode file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the devicechanges to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).For non-MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS-RAM(yellow).3
Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-26Download Code to DevicesCode can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload starts, the device being downloaded changes toOOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the devicechanges to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloadinga device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically ifthe code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is theversion number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must havethe correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manuallyselected.The following are the devices to be downloaded:SSpan Configuration- Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)- Group Line Interface (GLI2 or GLI3)SClock Synchronization Module (CSM)SMulti Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X)STest Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) - if RFDS is installedNOTE The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and data,and put INS before downloading any other device. Thedownload code process for an MGLI automatically downloadsdata and enables the MGLI before downloading other devices.The other devices can be downloaded in any order.Follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to download the firmwareapplication code for the MGLI. The download code action downloadsdata and also enables the MGLI.PrerequisitePrior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each ofthe devices to be downloaded.Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLInStep Action1 Select Tools>Update Next Load>CDMA function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to thecorrect code version level.2Download code to the primary MGLI by clicking on the MGLI.- From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.- Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI should automatically be downloaded withdata and enabled.)3Download code and data to the redundant MGLI but do not enable at this time. 3
Download the BTS68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-27Download Code and Data to Non-GLI DevicesNon-GLI devices can be downloaded individually or all equippeddevices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure inTable 3-13 to download code and data to the non-GLI devices.NOTE - When downloading multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). Thesedevices can be downloaded separately after completing themultiple download.- CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newersoftware version.Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-GLI DevicesnStep Action1Select all devices to be downloaded.2From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.Click OK to close the status window.NOTEAfter the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download iscompleted successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed toOOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.NOTEThe command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be downloaded without doing a codedownload anytime a device is OOS-RAM using the command in Step 3.3To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:Device>Download>Data3
Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-28Select CSM Clock SourceA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source for each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options:SLocal GPSSMate GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)SHSO ExtenderSHSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)SLFR (only for sources 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)PrerequisitesMGLI=INS_ACTCSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACTFollow the procedure in Table 3-14 to select a CSM Clock Source.Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock SourceStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s).2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.4Click on the Select Clock Source menu item.A clock source selection window is displayed.5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.6Click on the OK button.A status report window displays the results of the selection action.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Enable CSMsEach BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver(mounted on CSM-1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizesthe entire cellular system. CSM-2 provides redundancy but does nothave a GPS receiver.3
Download the BTS68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-29The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN-C LFR, HSO10 MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which theCSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSMmonitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.NOTE - CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retainedin EEPROM. The download code procedure is required inthe event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs withupdated software versions. Use the status function todetermine the current code load versions.- For non-RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured withthe GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in theCSM-1 slot before continuing.- The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloadedwith code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the CSMs.Table 3-15: Enable CSMsnStep Action1Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.2Click on the target CSM.From the Device pull down, select Enable.NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first and then CSM-1.A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.Click OK to close the status window.NOTEFAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown inthe Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM-1houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.NOTEThe GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained andoperated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alterssatellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INScontains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to onehour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D positionfix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPSreceiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS-ACT) andCSM-2 as dark green (INS-STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, thePWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).3If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.3
Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-30Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 ms).Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the MCCs.NOTE The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled(IN-SERVICE ACTIVE) before downloading and enabling theMCC.Table 3-16: Enable MCCsnStep Action1Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.2Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pull-down menu choose MCCs.3From the Device menu, select EnableA status report confirms change in the device(s) status.4Click on OK to close the status report window.Enable Redundant GLIsFollow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the redundant GLI(s).Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIsnStep Action1Select the target redundant GLI(s).2From the Device menu, select Enable.A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) isgreen.3Click on OK to close the status report window.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-31CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO VerificationCSM & LFR BackgroundThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM inslot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. TheCSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remoteGPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna headthat has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughtercard as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock DistributionCards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608MHz clocks. CCD-1 is married to CSM-1 and CCD-2 is married toCSM 2. A failure on CSM-1 or CCD-1 cause the system to switch toredundant CSM-2 and CCD-2.In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase LockedLoop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated byeither an on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver(R-GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. DPLLcircuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primaryand redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primaryand redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back-up source,provides excellent reliability and performance.Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewavereference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,LORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHzsignals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the topinterconnect panel for distribution to co-located frames at the site.Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure on CSM-1. During normal operation, the CSM-1board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The sourceselection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.All boards are mounted in the C-CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.Figure 1-10 on page 1-28 illustrates the location of the boards in theBTS frame.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-32Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability OscillatorThe CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoringfunctions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO iscapable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPSreference signal.The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RFsignals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which issynchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. TheLFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since theHSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXLFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logicalframes require an HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame hasan LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frameand interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR andLFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-18).HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection(see Table 3-18).NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM boardwarm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillatorfrequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-upallows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequencybefore any measurements are made.Front Panel LEDsThe status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:SSteady Green - Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).SRapidly Flashing Green - Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR(STBY).SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red - CSM OOS-RAM attemptingto lock on GPS signal.SRapidly Flashing Green and Red - Alarm condition exists. TroubleNotifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-33CSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSMboards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of thisprocedure will be repeated for final verification after the overalloptimization has been completed.Null Modem CableA null modem cable is required. It is connected between the MMI portof the primary CSM and the null modem board. Figure 3-8 shows thewiring detail for the null modem cable.Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail53278146GNDRXTXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRGNDTXRXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRON BOTH CONNECTORSSHORT PINS 7, 8;SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 69-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE52378146 DSR DSRFW00362PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment whilereferring to Figure 3-9 as required.Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1Perform one of the following operations:SFor local GPS (RF-GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSMslot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.SFor Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 isINS.This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).2Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemboard) to the MMI port on CSM-1.3Reinstall CSM-2.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-34Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action4Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-5)NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.5When the terminal screen appears, press the <Enter> key until the CSM> prompt appears. Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS-232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSM board shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9-PIN TO 9-PINRS-232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS-RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = Fault3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-35GPS Initialization/VerificationFollow the procedure in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper GPSreceiver operation.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board (see Figure 3-9).SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.CAUTION Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if theGPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RFconnector.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-36Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus- Observe the following typical response:Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and theGPS receivers.sources- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid-------------------------------------------------------------------------0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed-out* Timed-out* No*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a validsource by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-37Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action4If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage5Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.6Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus- Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991-1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-38Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).8If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.9Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed-up proceed to step 10)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-39Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action10 Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-201317511 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3µs limit).- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.12 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp LFR Initialization/VerificationThe LORAN-C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with theCSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overallconfiguration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:SAutomatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a seconddifferential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)SA 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSMIf the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-20to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source forthe GPS.NOTE If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped withan LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped with anHSO.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-40Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB -6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N FlagThis shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.- Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.- Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good -3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 1. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-41Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction4LORAN-C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the Hyperterminal window. HSO Initialization/VerificationThe HSO module is a full-size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillatorinterfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSMhandles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of theHSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintainingsynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for alimited time.The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not coveredby the LORAN-C system and provides the following major functions:SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitrySGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHzTTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-42PrerequisitesSThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM viaa null modem board.SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15minutes.If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21to configure the HSO.Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/VerificationStep Action1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.NOTEThe LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSMmust be locked to GPS.2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx -69532 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 0When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>Check for Good in the Status field.4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. TheHSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-43Test Equipment Set-upConnecting Test Equipment to the BTSAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus.If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece oftest equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have been set correctly(normally 1 for a signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for aCDMA analyzer). See Appendix J for procedures to verify and changethe GPIB addresses.The following equipment is required to perform optimization:SLMFSTest setSDirectional coupler and attenuatorSRF cables and connectorsSNull modem cable (see Figure 3-8)SGPIB interface boxRefer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections fortest equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see thefollowing figures:SFigure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.SFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-16 shows test set connections for IS-95 A/B andCDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show typical TX and RX ATP setup witha directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).Supported Test SetsCAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connectionsmust be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator asshown in the test setup illustrations.IS-95 A/B TestingOptimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B may be performed usingone of the following test sets:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSHewlett-Packard HP 8935SHewlett-Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power MeterThe equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-44CDMA 2000 TestingNOTE IS-95 C is the same as CDMA 2000.Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of thefollowing test sets:SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal GeneratorSAgilent E4406A with E4432B Signal GeneratorSHewlett-Packard HP 8935 with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX andwith Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FERThe E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should beconnected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 andR3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to theSerial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in bothIS-95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options areinstalled.Optional test equipmentSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - can be used to perform cablecalibration.3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-45Test Equipment Reference ChartTable 3-22 and Table 3-23 depicts the current test equipment availablemeeting Motorola standards.To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presentlybeing used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable tothat port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.Table 3-22: IS-95 A/B Test Equipment SetupCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber-TestAdvant-estR3465 HP8935 HP8921A HP 8921W/PCS PowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF30 dB Direction-al Coupler & 20dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEIN EXTREF INCDMATIMEBASE INCDMATIMEBASE INCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP-IB HP-IB GPIB SERIALPORTHP-IB HP-IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50-OHM RFIN/OUT TX1-6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 30 DB COUPLERAND 20 DB PADRX TESTCABLES RF GENOUT RF OUT50-OHM RX1-6DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORRFIN/OUT3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-46Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment SetupTEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAdvantestR3562SignalGeneratorAdvantestR3267AnalyzerAgilentE4406AAnalyzerAgilentE4432BSignalGenerator HP8935 PowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF30 dBDirectionalCoupler &20 dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EXTTRIG IN EXT TRIG TRIGGERIN19.6608 MHZCLOCKMOD TIMEBASE IN EXTREF INCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP-IB GPIB SERIALPORTHP-IBTX TESTCABLES RF OUT RF IN TX1-6RF INPUT50 OHM 30 DB COUPLERAND 20 DB PADRX TESTCABLES RF GENOUT RF OUT50-OHM RX1-6RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORPATTERNTRIG INGPIBRF OUTPUT50 OHMRF OUTPUT50-OHM10 MHZ IN 10 MHZ OUT 10 MHZ IN10 MHZ OUT10 MHZSERIAL I/O SERIAL I/OSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OEVENSECONDSYNC INEXTREF INHP-IBRFIN/OUTDUPLEX3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-47Equipment Warm-upNOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior toperforming the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTSsite stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Timespent running initial power-up, hardware/firmware audit, andBTS download counts as warm-up time.)Calibrating CablesFigure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the cable calibration setup for varioussupported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location ofthe input and output ports of each test set, and the right side details theset up for each test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TXOUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX channelskeyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna(sector) assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-48Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test SetupMotorola CyberTestHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935Advantest Model R3465DUPLEXOUTRF OUTPUT50-OHMRF INPUT50-OHMRF GEN OUTANT INANTINSUPPORTED TEST SETS100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN-N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The Directional Coupler is not used with theCybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connecteddirectly to the Cybertest Test Set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest TestSet. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEFW00089Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921ADIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N-N FEMALEADAPTERDUPLEXOUTRF IN/OUT3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-49Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A)100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN-N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLETESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEREF FW00089DIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N-N FEMALEADAPTERRF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)EXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)RFINPUT 50OHMRFOUTPUT50 OHMAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)SUPPORTED TEST SETSHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEXOUTANTINSetup for TX CalibrationFigure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-50Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)Motorola CyberTestHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANEL RFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS2O DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSANTENNA PORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.Advantest Model R3465INPUT50-OHMGPIBCONNECTS TOBACK OF UNIT* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-51Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS2O DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSANTENNA PORTPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)** A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORREF FW0009430 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERAgilent E4406AAdvantest Model R3267RF INRF INPUT50 ΩHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935RF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOX3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-52Setup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/Boptimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-16 shows test set connections forIS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935)Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935TEST SET Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRS232 NULLMODEMCABLEBTSTXTESTCABLE10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSRFIN/OUTTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)EVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSM30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)CDMALMFREF FW000963
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-53Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A)RF OUTONLYHewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)EVENSECOND/SYNCINCDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMRFIN/OUTREF FW00097GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERRFIN/OUTRF OUTONLYHP PCS INTERFACE(FOR 1700 AND 1900 MHZ ONLY)3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-54Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A)TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANACOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.EVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00758RFINPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATOREXT REF INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER RF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”SYNTHEREF INTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERSIGNAL GENERATORRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSTX DIRECTIONALCOUPLERANTENNA PORTRXTESTCABLE100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERTXTESTCABLEBNC“T”19.6608MHZCLOCKEXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)10 MHZREF OUTNOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZER.10MHZIN10MHZOUTNOTE:FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTEDBETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNALGENERATOR3
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-55TX ATP SetupFigure 3-17 shows a typical TX ATP setup.Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER40W NON-RADIATINGRF LOADOUTPUTPORTRVS (REFLECTED)PORT 50-OHMTERMINATIONFWD(INCIDENT)PORTBTS INPUTPORT TX TESTCABLEConnect TX test cable betweenthe directional coupler input portand the appropriate TX antennadirectional coupler connector.TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS Detail123RF FEED LINE TODIRECTIONALCOUPLERREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETINAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-22.TXTESTCABLETX RF FROM BTS FRAMETESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLERNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND COMPANION FRAMES. FW00116REF3
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-56Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional CouplerRX RF FROM BTSFRAME341256Connect RX test cable betweenthe test set and the appropriateRX antenna directional coupler.RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRF FEED LINE TOTX ANTENNAREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETRFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS DetailOUTAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-22.RX TestCableNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.FW001153
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-57Test Set CalibrationTest Set Calibration BackgroundProper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment andassociated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and thatmeasurements are correct.NOTE If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has beencalibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not needto be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,communications test set, additional test equipment, associatedtest cables, and adapters.)This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables andadapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, thatmakes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introducemeasurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements anddegradation to system performance.NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent testequipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating theoverall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has beenallowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.Purpose of Test Set CalibrationThese procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used todetermine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch thatmake up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/lossoffset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.Selecting Test EquipmentUse LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipmentautomatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided fortest equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when thetest equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via aGPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used whenthe test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected tothe GPIB box.3
Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-58Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow theprocedure in Table 3-24 to select test equipment manually.Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabnStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.NOTEGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, butthe numbers in the GPIB address boxes must match the addresses of the test equipment.Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the testequipment, refer to Appendix J.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.Recommended Addresses1 = CDMA Signal generator13 = Power Meter18 = CDMA Analyzer7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)NOTEWith manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected andcommunicating with the LMF.To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix J.8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window. 3
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-59Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabWhen using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMFexamines which test equipment items are actually communicating withthe LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detectfeature.Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectnStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).NOTEGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, butthe numbers in the GPIB address to search box must match the addresses of the test equipment.Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the testequipment, refer to Appendix J.5Type the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).NOTEWhen both a power meter and an analyzer are selected, the LMF uses the first item that is capableof performing the test and is listed in the GPIB addresses to search box for RF powermeasurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a CDMA signal generator is normally 1, theaddress for a power meter is normally 13, and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If1,13,18 is included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RFpower measurements. When the test equipment items are manually selected, the CDMA analyzeris used only if a power meter is not selected.6Click on Apply.NOTEThe button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the ManualConfiguration section for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window. 3
Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-60Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the powermeter is zeroed.Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu tocalibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected beforecalibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate thetest equipment.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for teststhat are to be run.STest equipment has been selected.Table 3-26: Test Equipment CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.A Directions window is displayed.2Follow the directions provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window.A status report window is displayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.3
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-61Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)The Agilent E4406A requires pre-calibration actions or calibrationverification that are not supported by the LMF. Follow the procedure inTable 3-27 and refer to Figure 3-19 to perform the Agilent E4406Aself-alignment (calibration).Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration)Step Action1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.- The softkey labels will change.3Press the Align All Now softkey button.- All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.- The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.- The alignment will take less than one minute.Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignmentSystemKeySoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay Areati-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftw3
Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-62Calibrating CablesThe cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX andRX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used tomeasure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration andRX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:SMeasuring the loss of a short cable - This is required to compensatefor any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used onlyfor the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RXcable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the shortcable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cableconfiguration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cableconfigurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements to compensate for the measured loss.SMeasuring the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss -The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cablewith type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RXport of the test equipment.SMeasuring the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss -The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables withtype-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additionalattenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the pathloss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS(normally 30 or 50 dB).Calibrating Cables with a CDMA AnalyzerCable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F coversthe procedures for manual cable calibration.NOTE LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz) cannot beaccomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with PCS interface oran Advantest analyzer. A different analyzer type or the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method must be used (refer toTable 3-29 and Figure 3-20). Cable calibration values are thenmanually entered.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cablecalibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.3
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-63Table 3-28: Cable CalibrationnStep Action1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.A Cable Calibration window is displayed.2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.NOTEMultiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When twoor more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation isaccomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.3 Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration picklist.4 Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration. Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate the TX cables using asignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20 for adiagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCS3Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, A) and record thevalue.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of thediagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCSRecord the value at point B.5Calibration factor = A - BExample: Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test proceduresuse the correct calibration factor. 3
Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-64Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON-RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWERSENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THEPCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLETHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TOTHE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVELOFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THEPCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.AONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATORFW00293Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-30 to calibrate the RX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21, if required.Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernStep Action1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the SignalGenerator.2Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCS3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, A) and record thevalue for A.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at thecustomer’s RX frequency of:- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCSRecord the value at point B.. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-65Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzernActionStep5Calibration factor = A - BExample: Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dBmNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the finaltest setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP TestSpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE HP PCSINTERFACE OUTPUT PORTDURING RX MEASUREMENTS.SignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGCABLE 2CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW002943
Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-66Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations arenormally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable testequipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. Thecable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedurein Table 3-31 to set cable loss values.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-31: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.A data entry pop-up window appears.3To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.NOTESIf cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login. 3
Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-67Setting Coupler Loss ValuesIf an in-service coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) mustbe manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibrationand audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow the procedure inTable 3-32 to set coupler loss values.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTS.Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss ValueStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window appears.3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.NOTESThe In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must be checkedbefore entered coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX FERtest.SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-68Bay Level Offset CalibrationIntroduction to Bay Level Offset CalibrationCalibration compensates for normal equipment variations within theBTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.RF Path Bay Level Offset CalibrationCalibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibrationtable in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port andterminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBXbackplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TXantenna port.For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of thecell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansioncable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of thesame expansion frame.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Eachtransmit path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travelsthrough the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX pathcalibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to thedefault value.At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless ofphysical BBX board installation in the slot.When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required:SAfter initial BTS installationSOnce each yearSAfter replacing any of the following components or associatedinterconnecting RF cabling:- BBX board- C-CCP shelf- CIO card- CIO to LPA backplane RF cable- LPA backplane-LPA- TX filter / TX filter combiner- TX thru-port cable to the top of frame3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-69TX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector you must first verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned tothe LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is ahigh probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of eachCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBXboards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under testand install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currentlybeing tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that aredue for periodic optimization.- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correctBBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to includeBBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).BLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts-n.cal calibration(BLO) offset data file in the bts-n folder. After calibration has beencompleted, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using theDownload BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you printout a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the followingdescriptions.The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (aslot Block).Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slotheader block contains:SA creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header andactual calibration data.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-70SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. Thearray is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch thecontained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, mainreceive and diversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array AssignmentsRange AssignmentC[1]-C[240] TransmitC[241]-C[480] Main ReceiveC[481]-C[720] Diversity ReceiveNOTE Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurationssupported are Omni, 3-sector or 6-sector.Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX Sectorization TX RX RX DiversitySlot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)1 (Omni) 3-Sector, C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]23-Sector,1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]41stCarrier 3-Sector, C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]5Carrier 3-Sector,3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]73-Sector, C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]83-Sector,2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]10 2ndCarrier 3-Sector, C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]11 Carrier 3-Sector,4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX-13)1 (Omni) 3-Sector, C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]23-Sector,1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]41stCarrier 3-Sector, C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]5Carrier 3-Sector,3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600] . . . continued on next page3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-71Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX RX DiversityRXTXSectorization73-Sector, C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]83-Sector,2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]10 2ndCarrier 3-Sector, C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]11 Carrier 3-Sector,4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Twoentries are required for each calibration point.SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all evenentries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated isrepeated to fill out the 10 points.Example:C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”C[2]=19102, even cal entryC[3]=777,C[4]=19086,..C[19]=777,C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this would be repeated for the next 8 points)SWhen the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for theBBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the calfile. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibrationpoints are sent (C[1] - C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibrationpoints (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] -C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] - C[720]).STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for eachset.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-72Test Equipment Setup: RF Path CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table 3-35 to set up test equipment.Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)Step ActionNOTEVerify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have notalready done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6.SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-26 on page 3-60.SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 on page 3-50.TX Path CalibrationThe assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the topof the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelListCDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwrCDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (locatedunder the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF fileparameter).NOTE If both the BTS-x.cdf and CBSC-x.cdf files are current, allinformation will be correct on the LMF. If not, the carrier andchannel will have to be set for each test.The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dBof the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than+1.5 dB.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupleroption, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately 42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output powermeasured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Outputminus BBX output level.SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Auditmenu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TXaudit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made throughthe appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-73Rate Set Drop-down Pick ListThe Rate Set Drop-down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card isselected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for thetest. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.Verify BLOIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using theUtil>Edit>TX Coupler Loss... function.Single-sided BLOAnother option that appears in the pull-down menu is Single-sidedBLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus-or-minus someoffset. The ranges that we currently use for calibration are wider thannecessary to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of thatrange is where non-redundant BBXs should be. When Single-sidedBLO is selected, the result is only considered a success if it is in thelower half of the range. If it was normally a success from 37-47 (whichis 42 "5), Single-sided BLO would make it a success only if the resultwas from 37-42. To get the more stringent conditions, the operatorchecks Single-sided BLO when calibrating non-redundant transceivers.Single-sided BLO carries the likelihood of more failures. This optionshould only be used by experienced CFEs.Test PatternThe TESTS_TX CAL menu has a Test Pattern pull-down menu. Thismenu has the following choices:SPilot (default) - performs tests using a pilot signal only. This patternshould be used when running in-service tests. It only requires a BBXto do the test.SStandard - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and sixtraffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non-in-servicetests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gainvalues specified by the IS97 standard.SCDFPilot -performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gainis specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot togenerate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGainparameter in the CDF file instead of a pre-determined value.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-74SCDF - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six trafficchannels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified inthe CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standardpattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings forthe following CDF parameters are used:- PilotGain- PchGain- SchGain- NomGain1WayPrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and dataload.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 and follow theprocedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards movedsince they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.Table 3-36: BTS TX Path CalibrationnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.NOTEIf STANDARD or CDF is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC must be alsoselected.2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.. . . continued on next page3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-75Table 3-36: BTS TX Path CalibrationnActionStep6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.7Click on OK.8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-76Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from theCAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded tothe selected BBX devices.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SBBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).STX calibration is successfully completed.Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to download the BLO data to theBBXs.Table 3-37: Download BLOnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.3Click on OK to close the status report window.Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration auditprocedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path atthe site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine thesuccess or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up isused.NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data downloadto BBXs must have been successfully completed prior toperforming the calibration audit.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-77TX Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slotsper the procedure in Table 3-38WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.TX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM-1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 or Figure 3-13.Follow the procedure in Table 3-38 to perform the BTS TX Path Audittest.Table 3-38: BTS TX Path AuditnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be audited.NOTEIf STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5If at least one MCC was selected in Step 1, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.6 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.. . . continued on next page3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-78Table 3-38: BTS TX Path AuditnActionStepNOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.7From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.8Click on OK.9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the Status Report window and provides information in theDescription field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run thetest. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer toChapter 6, Troubleshooting.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-79All Cal/Audit TestThe Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibrationand Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through theappropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.NOTE If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO data isautomatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portionof the test is run.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM-1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code and data loads.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit TestnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.NOTEIf STANDARD, CDFPilot, or CDF is selected for the TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCCmust be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5If at least one MCC was selected in Step1 select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.6 Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-80Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit TestnActionStep7From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.8Click on OK.9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. 3
Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-81Create CAL FileThe Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so itcan be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL fileexists. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.WARNING The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this action cancause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. Tomanually edit the CAL file, you must first logout of the BTS. Ifyou manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal Filefunction, the edited information is lost.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SLMF is logged into the BTS.SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.Table 3-40: Create CAL FilenStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs.NOTEThe CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.A status report window displays the results of the action.4 Click OK to close the status report window. 3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-82RFDS Set-up and CalibrationRFDS DescriptionNOTE The RFDS is not available for the -48 V BTS at the time of thispublication.The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or froman LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDSHardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:STX and RX CalibrationSDekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)SDownload Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)SForward TestSKey TSUSMeasure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)SPing TSUSProgram TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)SReverse TestSRGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)SSet ASUSStatus TSU3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-83RFDS Parameter SettingsThe bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that mustmatch the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe theeditable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-41 explains how to editthe parameter settings.SRfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (9600 system RFDS only)SAsu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)NOTE Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open anytext files to verify, view, or modify data.3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-84Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep ActionNOTELog out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).EXAMPLE:Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)Mc1Equip = 0Mc2Equip = 0Mc3Equip = 0Mc4Equip = 0RfdsEquip = 2TestOrigDN = ’123456789’TsuEquip = 1NOTEThe above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC andcopied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database ismodified for the RFDS.2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields, data will need to be downloadedto the GLI (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).3To download to the GLI, click on the Device menu and select the Download>Code/Data menu item(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).A status report window displays the status of the download.Click OK to close the status report window.! CAUTIONAfter downloading data to the GLI, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green forapproximately 2-3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LEDremains green.4Status the RFDS TSU.A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.NOTEIf the LMF yields an error message, check the following:SEnsure the AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify the RFDS has power.SVerify the RFDS status LED is green.SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).SStatus the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and thedevice is in the proper state (INS).3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-85RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate systemparameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSUphone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC-RRFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured thesame way that any local mobile subscriber would use.NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstall of the RFDS.The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive andprocess test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAMTable 3-42 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-42: Definition of ParametersAccess_Overload_CodeSlot_IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary_Channel_APrimary_Channel_BSecondary_Channel_ASecondary_Channel BThese parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.Lock_CodeSecurity_CodeService_LevelStation_Class_MarkDo not change.IMSI_11_12IMSI_MCC These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the followingcommand:OMC000>disp bts-# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN_1 Phone Number This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN andMIN should be entered into the switch as well.NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in thebts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,and the TestOrigDN is the number the subscriber calls.3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-86Valid NAM RangesTable 3-43 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess_Overload_Code 0 15Slot_Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary_Channel_A 25 1175Primary_Channel_B 25 1175Secondary_Channel_A 25 1175Secondary_Channel_B 25 1175Lock_Code 0 999Security_Code 0 999999Service_Level 0 7Station_Class_Mark 0 255IMSI_11_12 0 99IMSI_MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/ASet Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if anRFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if anRFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.Perform the procedure in Table 3-44 to set the Antenna Map Data.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSTable 3-44: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit>Antenna Map.A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.NOTERefer to the Util >Edit-antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.. . . continued on next page3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-87Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map DataStep ActionNOTEEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.NOTEValues entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved. Set RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-45 to set the RFDSConfiguration Data.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTS.NOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to theantenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit>RFDS Configuration.A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.3To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enterthe desired data.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the Util >Edit-RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration dataexamples.5To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.NOTESEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .NOTEValues entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-88RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peakperformance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX andRX paths.For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at apre-determined power level and the BTS power output level is measuredby the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antennadirectional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item beingused (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between thepower level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antennadirectional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at apre-determined power level and the power input level is measured by theBTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by theBTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by theRFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTSXCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CALfile.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SBBXs are OOS_RAM.SCable calibration has been performedSTX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded forthe BTS.STest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to calibrate the TX and RX antennapaths.Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration ProcedurenStep Action1Select the BTS tab.2Select the B (for BTS) radio button.3Select the BBX to use during the test.4Select the RFDS menu.5Select the RFDS Calibration menu item.6Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.7Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.NOTESeparate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channelnumber (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385-395 for numbers through and including).. . . continued on next page3
RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-89Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration ProcedurenActionStep8Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.NOTEUse the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple carriers.9Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.10 Click OK.A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the results of the actions.12 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.13 Click on the MGLI.14 Download updated RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device by clicking onDevice>Download>Data from the tab menu bar and pull-down menu. Program TSU NAMFollow the procedure in Table 3-47 to program the TSU NAM. TheNAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SMGLI is INS.STSU is powered up and has a code load.Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAMStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).3Click on the TSU menu.4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-42 and Table 3-43).6Click on the OK button to display the status report.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-90BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestingObjectiveThis section tests the redundancy options that could be included in thecell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modulesequipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partnerand resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently activeCSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMAreference signal.Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant optionsincluded in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basicpower supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in thefollowing tables should be bypassed.STable 3-50. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-51. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)STable 3-52. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm TestsSTable 3-53. LPA Redundancy TestSTable 3-54. MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestDuring redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the masterGLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.Test EquipmentThe following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:SLMFSCommunications Test SetRedundancy/Alarm TestPerform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and toconfirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. Theprocedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:SPower supply/converter modules in all framesSDistribution shelf modules in the BTS frameSC-CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)SLPA modules in the BTS frameSAMR Customer defined input/output tests3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-91Test Equipment SetupFollow the procedure in Table 3-48 to set up test equipment:NOTE All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action1Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-2,page 3-6).2Login to the BTS.3Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see Figure 3-12).NOTEIf site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI and BBX boards installed in any redundantslot positions at this time.4Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.5Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the AMR Alarm connector (A & B) byclicking on MGLI, then selecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.NOTEDuring configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious alarms may report. Allow the BTS tostabilize for 10 seconds. If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has stabilized,determine the cause before proceeding further.Power Supply RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-49 to verify redundancy of the power supplymodules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarmmonitor) are also verified.Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)Step Action1Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 2622Select (highlight) BBX-1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.3Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.4Remove PS-1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-22).- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.- Verify no other modules went OOS.5Re-install PS-1.Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS-2 and PS-3.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-92Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)ActionStepNOTEFor +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.7On -48 V systems, remove PS-4 (see Figure 3-23).- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.- Verify no other modules went OOS.8Re-install PS-4.Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.9Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS-5 through PS-9.10 Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.11 Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf19 mm Filler PanelPS-3AMR-1CSM-1CSM-238 mm Filler PanelAMR-2GLI2-1GLI2-2MCC-6BBX2-1BBX-2BBX-3BBX-4BBX-5BBX-6BBX-RSwitchMPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2CIOBBX-7BBX-8BBX-9BBX-10BBX-1 1BBX-12MCC-5MCC-4MCC-3MCC-2MCC-1MCC-12MCC-11MCC-10MCC-9MCC-8MCC-7PS-2PS-1CCD-2 CCD-1NOTE: MCCs may beMCC8Es, MCC24s, orMCC-1Xs. BBXs maybe BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.GLIs may be GLI2s orGLI3s.HSO/LFRFW002953
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-93Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion ShelfFW00501PS-6AMRPS-5PS-4PS-9PS-8PS-71C1A2A2C3C3A4A4CLPA1D1B2B2D3D3B4B4D3030303030303030FANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTMiscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy TestsFollow the steps in Table 3-50 to verify alarms reported by the masterGLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failureoccurs.Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm TestsStep Action1 Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.2Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:•Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-24 or Figure 3-25).•Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.NOTEFollow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.3Starter Frames Only:Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.•Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time.•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.4Expansion Frames Only:Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.•Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.•Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-94Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm TestsStep Action5If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.•Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-22).•Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).•Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.•Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.•Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarmmonitor).•Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.NOTEAll PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test. Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan ModulesFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFAN MODULESLATCHESFW001303
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-95Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan ModulesFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFAN MODULESLATCHESFW00489FAN MODULESLATCHESFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTFANMODULEPWR/ALMREARFRONTBBX RedundancyFollow the steps in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in theC-CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via thealarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additionalsectors at the customer’s discretion.Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy AlarmsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.3Remove the primary BBX.4Observe a carrier is still present.The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.5Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.6Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respectivefrequency.7Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-96Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy AlarmsStep Action8 The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.9Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.10 Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at eachrespective frequency:11 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm TestsFollow the procedure in Table 3-52 to verify the manual redundancy ofthe CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported isalso covered.NOTE DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-52, unless the site isconfigured with a LORAN-C or HSO timebase as a backup forthe GPS.Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Actionn WARNINGAny BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TXoutput assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX andDevice>BBX/MAWI>Key.2Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame (see Figure 3-26).This forces the LORAN-C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.3Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.4Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.5Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.6Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-97Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm TestsStep Action7 Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.SVarious CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.8Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.NOTEIt can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs goOOS_RAM.9Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.10 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.* IMPORTANTDO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.11 Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.SVarious CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.12 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.13 Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.SVerify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.SObserve PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.14 Disable the primary and redundant BBXs. 3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-98Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O PlateOUTLANINLANGPSABABSPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O BLFR/ALARM B 43A2A1A6A5A4A3B2B1B6B5B4BGND56123TX OUTSPAN I/O ASPAN I/O BCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDCHSORXALARM AEXP I/ORGDFRONTREARFW00215GPS INRGPSREF3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-99LPA Redundancy TestFollow the procedure in Table 3-53 to verify redundancy of the LPAs.WARNING First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFOREmoving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury and/or equipment damage.Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy TestStep Action1From the pulldown menu select:Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain> Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 2622Key-up the BBX assigned to the LPAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).3Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrieramplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.NOTESee Figure 3-14 for test equipment setup, if required.4Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st LPA of the pair.NOTEAfter power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for theremoval of the 1st LPA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must becomplete before proceeding.5 Verify:•The other LPA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the LPA.•The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzerdisplay remains basically unchanged.•LPA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.6Re-apply power to the LPA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.NOTEAll PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.7Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd LPA of the pair.8De-key the BBX.n WARNINGFirst verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do socan result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify LPAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cableon top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required. 3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-100MGLI/GLI Redundancy TestCAUTION This test can only be performed when the MM path is establishedby the MM (not just with LAPD link connected). Attempting toforce the GLIs to “hot swap” under alarm monitor control, whenisolated from the MM, causes MGLIs to hang up.Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)Step ActionNOTESThis test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connectedand communication is established with the MM.SBOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.1Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.2Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.3Pull the MGLI that is currently INS-ACT and has cage control.4Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.5Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.6Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.7Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.3
BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-101BTS Alarms TestingAlarm Test OverviewALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs andOutputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors andoutput devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of activesensors as well controlling output devices.The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signalscoming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarmconnectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top ofthe frame (see Figure 3-27). The ALARM A connector is alwaysfunctional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equippedin the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitorsinput numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors inputnumbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-28). State transitions on these inputlines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs areavailable. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is setby the CBSC.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util>Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included:SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, andMajor) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level ofalarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desiredalarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (forindividual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) whileclicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pausebutton is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. Whenthe Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked andthe Continue button is clicked are not displayed.SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms thatoccur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.3
BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-102Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering591602591602FW00301Purpose The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relaycontacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMRalarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Performthese procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reportedproperly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak systemperformance.Study the site engineering documents and perform the following testsonly after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required tointerconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relaysmeet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS InstallationManual.NOTE Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand thisprocedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform these tests:SLMFSAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) -optionalAbbreviations used in the following figures and tables aredefined as:SNC = normally closedSNO = normally openSCOM or C = commonSCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) OutputSCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) InputNOTE3
BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-103Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering59 160 2ALARM A(AMR 1) ALARM B(AMR 2)Returns2526A CDI 18 . . . A CDI 159 160 2 Returns2526B CDI 36 . . . B CDI 19FW00302NOTE The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the AlarmsTest Box Procedure, Table 3-55. If not using an Alarm Test Box,follow the procedure listed in Table 3-56.CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test BoxTable 3-55 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification usingthe Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare resultswith the LMF display.NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The defaultdelay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box switches in the newposition until the alarms have been reported.Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-27).9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported foreach switch setting.10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reportedfor each switch setting.11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting. . . continued on next page3
BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-104Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for eachswitch setting.15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.30 Select the MGLI.31 Click on the Device menu.32 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.33 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-105Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test BoxStep Action37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test BoxTable 3-56 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verificationwithout the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructedand compare results with the LMF display.NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The defaultdelay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait for the alarmreport before removing the short.Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep Action1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.2Select the MGLI.3Click on the Device menu.4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.5Click on Normally Open.A status report window displays the results of the action.6Click on OK to close the status report window.7Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.8Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.9Select the MGLI.10 Click on the Device menu.11 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.. . . continued on next page3
BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-106Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test BoxStep Action12 Click on Normally Closed.A status report window displays the results of the action.13 Click on OK to close the status report window.Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.14 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.15 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.16 Select the MGLI.17 Click on the Device menu.18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.19 Click on Unequipped.A status report window displays the results of the action.20 Click on OK to close the status report window.21 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.No alarms should be displayed.22 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins(25-26 through 59-60) together.No alarms should be displayed.23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file. Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsTable 3-57 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsALARM A ALARM BPin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name1A CDO1 NC 31 Cust Retn 4 1B CDO9 NC 31 B CDI 222A CDO1 Com 32 A CDI 4 2B CDO9 Com 32 Cust Retn 223A CDO1 NO 33 Cust Retn 5 3B CDO9 NO 33 B CDI 234A CDO2 NC 34 A CDI 5 4B CDO10 NC 34 Cust Retn 23. . . continued on next page3
BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-107Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm ConnectorsALARM A ALARM BPin Signal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal Name5A CDO2 Com 35 Cust Retn 6 5B CDO10 Com 35 B CDI 246A CDO2 NO 36 A CDI 6 6B CDO10 NO 36 Cust Retn 247A CDO3 NC 37 Cust Retn 7 7B CDO11 NC 37 B CDI 258A CDO3 Com 38 A CDI 7 8B CDO11 Com 38 Cust Retn 259A CDO3 NO 39 Cust Retn 8 9B CDO11 NO 39 B CDI 2610 A CDO4 NC 40 A CDI 8 10 B CDO12 NC 40 Cust Retn 2611 A CDO4 Com 41 Cust Retn 9 11 B CDO12 Com 41 B CDI 2712 A CDO4 NO 42 A CDI 9 12 B CDO12 NO 42 Cust Retn 2713 A CDO5 NC 43 Cust Retn 10 13 B CDO13 NC 43 B CDI 2814 A CDO5 Com 44 A CDI 10 14 B CDO13 Com 44 Cust Retn 2815 A CDO5 NO 45 Cust Retn 11 15 B CDO13 NO 45 B CDI 2916 A CDO6 NC 46 A CDI 11 16 B CDO14 NC 46 Cust Retn 2917 A CDO6 Com 47 Cust Retn 12 17 B CDO14 Com 47 B CDI 3018 A CDO6 NO 48 A CDI 12 18 B CDO14 NO 48 Cust Retn 3019 A CDO7 NC 49 Cust Retn 13 19 B CDO15 NC 49 B CDI 3120 A CDO7 Com 50 A CDI 13 20 B CDO15 Com 50 Cust Retn 3121 A CDO7 NO 51 Cust Retn 14 21 B CDO15 NO 51 B CDI 3222 A CDO8 NC 52 A CDI 14 22 B CDO16 NC 52 Cust Retn 3223 A CDO8 Com 53 Cust Retn 15 23 B CDO16 Com 53 B CDI 3324 A CDO8 NO 54 A CDI 15 24 B CDO16 NO 54 Cust Retn 3325 Cust Retn 1 55 Cust Retn 16 25 B CDI 19 55 B CDI 3426 A CDI 1 56 A CDI 16 26 Cust Retn 19 56 Cust Retn 3427 Cust Retn 2 57 Cust Retn 17 27 B CDI 20 57 B CDI 3528 A CDI 2 58 A CDI 17 28 Cust Retn 20 58 Cust Retn 3529 Cust Retn 3 59 Cust Retn 18 29 B CDI 21 (+27 V)Converter Alarm (-48 V)59 B CDI 3630 A CDI 3 60 A CDI 18 30 Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)Converter Retn (-48V)60 Cust Retn 36NOTECDO = Customer Defined OutputCDI = Customer Defined Input 3
BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL3-108Notes3
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-1Chapter 4Automated Acceptance TestProcedure4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-2Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RXIntroductionThe Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular FieldEngineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTSsubsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) andsupported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)assignment.The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to afile that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platformusing the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipmentsupported by the LMF can be used.This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which isthe recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages ofsimplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeyingcommmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the executionof complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feelthe command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into theprogress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, referto LMF CLI Commands.CAUTION Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS) sectorsonly.DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the LMF.NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test setcomponents, if required.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-3Reduced ATPNOTE Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense-governing bodies require documentation supportingSITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTSsite are NOT required.After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Auditand FER tests.2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section(Appendix C) to determine the applicable test that must be performed.In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.Required Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications system analyzerSSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communicationssystem analyzers for 1X FER)WARNING -Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed.- At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.NOTE The test equipment must be re-calibrated before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-4ATP Test PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have beencompleted:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) havecorrect code load and data load.SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest cables are calibrated.STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-14 throughFigure 3-18 starting on page 3-52).STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.SGPIB is on.SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed.WARNING Before performing the FER, be sure that all LPAs are turnedOFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports areproperly terminated.All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury orequipment damage.TX OUT ConnectionNOTE Many of the acceptance test procedures require takingmeasurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At siteswithout RFDS installed, all measurements will be via the BTSTX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed, allmeasurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler TXOUT connector.ATP TestsThe tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs andpassive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filters,and RF cables.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-5SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansionframes), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive componentsincluding RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.NOTE The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX pathcalibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,remove the manual control/system memory card from the cardslot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode beforestarting the automated testing.Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.NOTE The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedurenStep Action1Ensure that all pre-requisites have been met.NOTEIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi-Channel Preselector setting thanthe one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again withthe new Multi-Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false testfailure.2AUTHOR NOTE:Is this step necessary for the T and ET? As it stands now,the additional test equipment set−up table is not in the Tand ET books.If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 8, performthe additional test equipment set-up in Table ??? for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.3Select the device(s) to be tested.4From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrierpick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.6Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in thecbsc-n.cdf file for the BTS.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.7If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.. . . continued on next page4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-6Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedurenActionStepNOTEIf a companion frame with the inter-frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested donot select BOTH in step 8. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi-Coupler Preselector type to provide theproper test signal gain.8Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop-down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.9In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop-down list.10 Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. Bydefault, all channel elements are specified.Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:- Enter non-sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;0,5,15).- Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elementsseparated by two periods (for example; 0..15).NOTEThe channel element numbers are 0 based; that is the first channel element is 0.11 If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channelelements is specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.12 Click on the OK button.The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.13 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button tobegin testing.The test results are displayed in the status report window.14 Click on Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-7TX Output Acceptance Tests: IntroductionIndividual Acceptance TestsThe following individual tests can be used to verify the results ofspecific tests.Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification withrespect to the assigned CDF file values.Waveform Quality (rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value inANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual andperfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, PilotGain = 262, PN Offset = 0).Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channelpower).Frame Error RateThe Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entireCDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to allrespective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on alltraffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs atan RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC).4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-8TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance TestTx Mask TestThis test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDSdirectional coupler).NOTE TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power levelto +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gainset to 541.The calibrated communications test set measures and returns theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolutionbandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channelmeasured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meetsystem tolerances at the following test points:S1.7/1.9 GHz:- at least -45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency- at least -45 dB @ - 900 kHz from center frequencyS800 MHz:- at least -45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency- at least -45 dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequencyThe BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-9Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display- 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter FrequencyReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz- 750 kHz- 1980 kHzFW002824
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-10TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance TestRho TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that theresult meets system tolerances:SWaveform quality (rho) should be w0.912 (-0.4dB).The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-11TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance TestPilot Offset Acceptance TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements fromthe MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using bothbbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the PilotTime Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:SPilot Time Offset should be within v3 ms of the target PTOffset (0ms).The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-12TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance TestCode Domain Power TestThis test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrierkeyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled bythe same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCCchannel elements under test are configured to generate OrthogonalChannel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to beassigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs tobe tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channelelements are verified on all sectors.BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUTconnector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).Verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODDnumbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done byverifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to10.2 $ 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channelsmeasures v -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).NOTE When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is an MCC8Eor MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or show marginalperformance. This is due to a timing mismatch that the LMF does notaddress. Performing this test from the CBSC will not have this timingproblem.The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, theOCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-13Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor LevelsPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < -27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< -27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64FAILURE - DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE - EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE - EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC. Showing all OCNS Passing Indicating Failures FW002834
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-14RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance TestFER TestThis test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currentlyconfigured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF inputlevel of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower TopAmplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibratedtest set as the signal source controlled by the same command. Allmeasurements are via the LMF.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channelelements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyedup, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (withpilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to -20 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDSdirectional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receivecircuitry.The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcodeand provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverselink for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying thatresults meet the following specification:SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. TheBBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assignthe applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths undertest. The test is then repeated.See Table 4-1 to perform this test.4
Generate an ATP Report68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-15Generate an ATP ReportBackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include theresults of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used toclose the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if thestatus reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.ATP ReportEach time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTSand includes the following for each test:STest nameSBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)STime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATPreport for a BTS.Table 4-2: Generating an ATP ReportnStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.3Click on the Report button.4Click on a column heading to sort the report.5- If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.- If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on theSave button.4
Generate an ATP Report 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL4-16Notes4
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-1Chapter 5Prepare to Leave the Site5
Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-2Prepare to Leave the SiteExternal Test Equipment RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-1: External Test Equipment RemovalStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.CAUTION Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to thecorrect ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will causesystem degradation of call processing.NOTE Each module or device can be in any state prior to downloading.Each module or device will be in an OOS_RAM state afterdownloading has completed.- For all LMF commands, information in italics representsvalid ranges for that command field.- Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.Default values for other fields will be assumed.- For more complete command examples (including systemresponse details), refer to the CDMA LMF User Guide.5
Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-3Reset All DevicesReset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. Theconfiguration data and code loads could be different from data and codeon the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper dataand code when the span is active again.Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processormodules from the OOS to INS mode.NOTE Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all devices atthe BTS.Table 5-2: Enabling DevicesnStep Action1On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.NOTEThe MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.2Click on Device from the menu bar.3Click on Enable from the Device menu.A status report window is displayed.NOTEIf a BBX is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keyinginformation.Do not enable the BBX.4 Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.A status report window displays the status of the device.5 Click OK to close the status report window.The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.5
Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-4Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame ModemBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors thatwere removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-3and Figure 5-1 as required.Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM ConnectionsStep Action1Connect the 50-pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50-pin TELCO connectors.2If used, connect the dial-up modem RS-232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS-232 9-pinsub D connector.NOTEVerify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated FrameModem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections50-PIN TELCOCONNECTORSREMOVEDSPAN A CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESSPAN B CONNECTOR(TELCO) INTERFACETO SPAN LINESTOP of Frame (Site I/O and Span I/O boards)RS-232 9-PIN SUB DCONNECTOR SERIALPORT FOR EXTERNALDIAL UP MODEMCONNECTION (IF USED)FW002995
Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-5BTS Site Span Configuration VerificationPerform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should beverified.Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of theMGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).2Start an MMI communication session with MGLI2 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-5 on page 3-11).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line codeconfiguration (in bold type):span view <cr>Observe a display similar to the options shown below:COMMAND ACCEPTED: span viewThe parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)S D D f lt (0 131 f t f T1/J1 120 Oh f E1) Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.If the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correctchoice, proceed to Table 5-5.4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-6Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port ConnectionFW003449-PIN TO 9- PINRS-232 CABLENULL MODEM BOARD(PART# 8484877P01)RS-232 CABLE FROM LMF COM1PORTMMI SERIAL PORTGLI BOARDSet BTS Site Span ConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must beconfigured.NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurationsloaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match those in theOMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to thefront panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-5 on page 3-11).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-7Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parametersto match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>option#1 = the span to change (a - f)option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbpsoption#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:span_config a 1 64 7 1..span_config f 1 64 7 1Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:span_config a 5 64 4 0..span_config f 5 64 4 0NOTEMake sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may bedifferent for each individual span.After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/GLI2 board MUST be reset andre-loaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used atthe site.4Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-8Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next GLI2and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards.6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI. Updating CBSC LMF FilesUpdated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from theLMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unixenvironment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files fromone environment to the other.Backup CAL Data to a DisketteThe BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a CDMALMF computer to a diskette.Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a DiskettenStep Action1Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.NOTEIf your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOSformatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or on-line helpon how to format diskettes.2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.3Click on your C: drive.4Double Click on the wlmf folder.5Double Click on the CDMA folder.6Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.7Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release themouse button.8Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.9Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.5
Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-9LMF RemovalCAUTION DO NOT power down the LMF without performing theprocedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session andremove the terminal.Table 5-7: LMF Termination and RemovalnStep Action1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables asrequired for equipment transport.Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedure in Table 5-8 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCnStep Action1Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.NOTEEnter the information that appears in bold text.2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.3 Type eject -q and press the <Enter> key.4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.NOTEIf the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the <Enter> key.6 Enter ls -lia and press the <Enter> key.Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the diskette.7 Enter cd and press the <Enter> key.8 Enter pwd and press the <Enter> key.Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the <Enter> key (where # is theBTS number).. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL5-10Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCnActionStep10 Enter ls -l *.cal and press the <Enter> key.Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.11 Type eject and press the <Enter> key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1NOTE After all activities at the site have been completed, and afterdisconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R andrequest the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.5
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-1Chapter 6Basic Troubleshooting6
Basic Troubleshooting Overview 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-2Basic Troubleshooting OverviewOverviewThe information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basictroubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not performper the procedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained form experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.6
Troubleshooting: Installation68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-3Troubleshooting: InstallationCannot Log into Cell-SiteFollow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If the MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset the MGLI by re-seating it. Ifthis persists, install a known good MGLI card in the MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may alsoindicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-5).If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-6 on page 3-14).4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (seeTable 3-2 on page 3-6).5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3-6).6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-13).8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primaryport.9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for thisconnection.10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI and retry.12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.Cannot Communicate to Power MeterFollow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power metercommunication failure.Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicableGPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 orTable 3-25 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix J for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test EquipmentPreparation section of Appendix F for details.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-4Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenActionStep5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB box power andretry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists. Cannot Communicate to Communications AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communicationsanalyzer communication failure.Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify signal generator is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable connections as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIBaddress box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or Table 3-25and the GPIB Address section of Appendix J for details.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test EquipmentPreparation section of Appendix F for details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box powerand retry.6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if aHyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.7 Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selectingTest Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists.6
Troubleshooting: Download68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-5Troubleshooting: DownloadCannot Download CODE to Any Device (card)Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code downloadfailure.Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.3Communication to the MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTSdevice.The MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.Reset the card by re-seating it.If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat the card and try again.7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting thedevice and Reset.9If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMFDevice > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.10 If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flashmemory.Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data downloadfailure.Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.6
Troubleshooting: Download 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-6Cannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The colorof the device changes to green once it is enabled.The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enablefailure.Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cellsite location and GPS sync.3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable. Miscellaneous ErrorsPerform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneousfailures.Table 6-7: Miscellaneous FailuresnStep Action1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect anMMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-5 on page 3-11).2 Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.(Call Field Support for further assistance.)6
Troubleshooting: Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-7Troubleshooting: CalibrationBay Level Offset Calibration FailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibrationfailure.Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)and connection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:For 1900 MHz:Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16For 800 MHz:Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8For 1700 MHz:Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=163Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry.6Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Refsignal.7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show“RES”. 6
Troubleshooting: Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-8Cannot Load BLOFor Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.Calibration Audit FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration auditfailure.Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section ofChapter 3).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensorhead.3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) PowerRef signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.Re-try the audit.6Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box andretry. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-9Troubleshooting: Transmit ATPBTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normaloperationFollow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Linkproblem during normal operation.Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)nStep Action1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:- TX mask- TX rho- TX code domainCannot Perform TX Mask MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX maskmeasurement failure.Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot timeoffset measurement failure.Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.3Re-load BBX data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling thecircuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPSis still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift-avg>and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilizedbefore going INS and may need to be re-initialized. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-10Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor MeasurementPerform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain andnoise floor measurement failure.Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). 6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-11Troubleshooting: Receive ATPMulti-FER Test FailurePerform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi-FERfailure.Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent offailure).6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. 6
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-12Troubleshooting: CSM Check-listProblem DescriptionMany of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures maybe resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory forrepair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in fieldreturns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver OperationIf having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”to the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kitSGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kitSGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectlyconfigured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt tochange hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPSantenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSMboard back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSMsoftware (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by anearlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded fromthe CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reloadfails.CSM Reference Source Configuration ErrorThis problem is caused by incorrect reference source configurationperformed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 andSGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shownbelow) to function correctly.CSM KitNo. HardwareConfiguration CSM SlotNo. Reference SourceConfiguration CDF ValueSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO 02 or 18SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO 12 or 186
Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-13Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INSThis problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check theaccuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM systemtime/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least onesatellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and foursatellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-14C-CCP Backplane TroubleshootingIntroductionThe C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all theC-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. Thisinformation allows the CFE to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf BusConnectorsThe 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface busfrom the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basicfunction is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to allother GLIs in the frame.The ISB also provides the following functions:SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.SMMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.SInterface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).Span Line ConnectorThe span line input is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primaryand secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI in the C-CCPshelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the MasterGLI and also all the BBX traffic.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference DistributionModule Input/OutputThe Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHzreference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in thebackplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits onthe GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signalfrequencies.Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)Provides a +27 volt or -48 volt input for use by the power supplymodules.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-15Power Supply Module InterfaceEach power supply module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. Theseinclude a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pininterface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C-CCPPower Modules convert +27 or -48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and+5.0 Volts to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards. In the -48 V BTS, theLPA power modules convert -48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.GLI ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C-CCP backplane.GLI 10Base-2 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routedto the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications between the master GLI and the other GLI, betweengateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.BBX ConnectorEach BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.CIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules -the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) tothe other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via theC-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent tothe appropriate BBX.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to thebackplane, then on to the MCC slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each outputis routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane tothe CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling tothe LPAs in the LPA shelf.C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting ProcedureTable 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. Thetables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.NOTE Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed beforereplacing ANY C-CCP backplane.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-16Digital Control ProblemsNo GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control viaLMF failure.Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)nStep Action1Check the 10Base-2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.2Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI. No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLIcontrol failures.Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)Step Action1Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection anddamage.6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLIStep Action1Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.3Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-17No AMR Control (MGLI good)Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR controlfailure when the MGLI control is good.Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX Control in the Shelf - (No Control overCo-located GLIs)Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control inthe shelf failure.Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIsStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficPerform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line trafficfailure.Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-18No (or Missing) MCC Channel ElementsPerform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elementsfailure.Table 6-21: No MCC Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify CEs on a co-located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2).2If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.- Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.3If no CEs on any MCC:- Verify clock reference to CIO.4Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8).6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-19DC Power ProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto power supply module failure.WARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to theBTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a secondperson present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleTable 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.2Verify there are no breakers tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker andattempt to reset it.- If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.- If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the shelf.3Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane bymeasuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” powerfeed clip on the distribution backplane.- If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.5If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.6Replace the power supply module with a known good module.7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) hasoccurred.6
C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-20No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI,BBX, or SwitchboardPerform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltageto GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsPerform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signalrouting problems.Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected boardslots.2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-21Module Front Panel LED Indicators and ConnectorsModule Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED Status CombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls thestate of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C-CCP and LPApower converters.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-22CSM LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT inDUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor PortsPWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303 . . . continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-23FREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. TheRS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily inthe development or factory environment, but may be used in thefield for debug/maintenance purposes.GLI2 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Figure 6-2.The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:ACTIVESolid GREEN - GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off - GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should beactive.MASTERSSolid GREEN - GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).SOff - GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARMSSolid RED - GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff - No Alarm.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-24STATUSSFlashing GREEN- GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn - GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff - GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANSSSolid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.GLI2 Pushbuttons and ConnectorsRESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbuttoncauses a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intendedto be used primarily in the development or factory environmentbut may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.LAN Connectors (A & B) - The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuitboard mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom frontedge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernetcabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNCconnectors.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-25Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front PanelMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE LEDSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESTATUS LEDRESETPUSHBUTTONALARM LEDSPANS LEDMASTER LEDSTATUS OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)RESETALARM OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)SPANSMASTERMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSAll functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasingthe switch.ON − operating normally in active modeOFF − operating normally in standby modeShows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON − active card operating normallyOFF − standby card operating normallyThe pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in thetop shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card inthe bottom shelf is in the standby mode.OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN − operating normallyYELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstateAn RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.FW00225 6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-26GLI3 Front PanelFigure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel.Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front PanelSTATUS OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)RESETALARM OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)BPR ASpanMMIACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSPressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON − active card operating normallyOFF − standby card operating normallyConnects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet client.An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.BPR BGLIAUXSupports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using adouble crossover cable.Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal com−puter with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernetsniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−itoring.Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet client.MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE-Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE-TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE-T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwOFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN − operating normallyYELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstate6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-27BBX LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarmSShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarmMCC LED Status CombinationsThe MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show theconnectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED - fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-28Figure 6-4: MCC Front PanelPWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEPWR/ALM OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up and during failureconditionsACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSRAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded butnot enabledSLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loadedON − card is code−loaded and enabled(INS_ACTIVE)COLORGREENREDRED ON − fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHIbus inactive on power−upAn alarm is generated in the event of a failureFW00224LPA Shelf LED Status CombinationsLPA Module LEDEach LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMIconnector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED asfollows:SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting anlow input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal anddoes not constitute a failure.6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-29Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control LinkSpan Problems (No Control Link)Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control linkfailure.Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown inFigure 6-5 or Figure 6-6.2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windowsdesktop shortcut icon.3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI>prompt is obtained.4At the GLI> prompt, enter:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu.9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole C-CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISBcabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-30Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8-PIN TO 10-PINRS-232 CABLE(P/N 30-09786R01)RS-232CABLE8-PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonGLIti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-31Figure 6-6: GLI3 Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8-PIN TO 10-PINRS-232 CABLE(P/N 30-09786R01)RS-232CABLE8-PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1 or COM2GLI3MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE-Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE-TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE-T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwREF6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-32Set BTS Site Span ConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 6-26 to set the span parameterconfiguration.NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurationsloaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match those in theOMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnStep Action1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicableMGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-5.2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate oneby using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.3At the GLI> prompt, enter:config ni format <option> <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST - option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 - E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 - E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 - E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 - E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 - D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 - ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 - ESF, B8ZS (Japan) - Default J1_2 : J1_2 - ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 - D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in-use) spans will be set to the same format.4To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), asshown in the following example:> T1_2 <cr> NOTEThe entry is case-sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-33Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep5An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>6If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni linkspeed <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:Next available options: LIST - linkspeed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in-use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.7To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),as shown in the following example:> 64K <cr>NOTEThe entry is case-sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>8An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>9If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni equal <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equalNext available options: LIST - span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-34Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown inthe following example:> a <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal Next available options: LIST - equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0-131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132-262 feet 2 : 263-393 feet 3 : 394-524 feet 4 : 525-655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)>11 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example:> 0 <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in-use span.NOTEAfter executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type andlinkspeed used at the site.13 Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-35Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep14 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are asrequired:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A - 0-131 feet Span B - 0-131 feet Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64KThe actual rate is 015 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it andrepeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.16 Return to step 6 of Table 6-25. 6
Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIAL6-36Notes6
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-1Appendix AData SheetsA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-2Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data SheetsVerification of Test Equipment UsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-3Site ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Deliveries Per established procedures-Floor Plan Verified---Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure---Factory Data:BBXTest PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure-Site Temperature-Dress Covers/BracketsPreliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage-BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-4Pre-Power and Initial Power TestsTable A-4: Pre-power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Pre-power-up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications--------Internal Cables:ISB (all cages)CSM (all cages)Power (all cages)Ethernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalled-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed-Initial power-up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications:Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-5General Optimization ChecklistTable A-5: Pre-power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments--LEDsFrame fansilluminatedoperational------LMF to BTS ConnectionPreparing the LMFLog into the LMF PCCreate site specific BTS directoryCreate master-bts-cdma directoryDownload device loadsMoving/Linking filesper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure--Ping LAN APing LAN Bper procedureper procedure----------Download/Enable MGLIsDownload/Enable GLIsSet Site Span ConfigurationDownload CSMsDownloadEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCCsDownload BBXsDownload TSU (in RFDS)Program TSU NAMper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure-Test Set Calibration per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-6GPS Receiver OperationTable A-6: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed-Current Position:latlonheightRECORD in msand cm alsoconvert to degmin sec-Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-7LFR Receiver OperationTable A-7: LFR Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-Station call letters M X Y Zassignment. as specified in sitedocumentation-SN ratio is > 8 dB-LFR Task State: lfrlocked to station xxxxVerify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-8LPA IM ReductionTable A-8: LPA IM ReductionParameter CommentsCARRIEROK LPA#4:1 & 2:13-Sector 2:16-Sector Dual BP3-Sector Dual BP6-SectorSpecification-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-4A C4 C2 No Alarms-4B C4 C2 No Alarms-4C C4 C2 No Alarms-4D C4 C2 No AlarmsComments:_________________________________________________________Cx - denotes physical carriersFor applied frequency requirements, see Appendix E.A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-9LPA ConvergenceTable A-9: LPA ConvergenceOK Parameter Specification DataLPA # Converged-1A Verify per procedure & upload-1B convergence data-1C-1D-2A Verify per procedure & upload-2B convergence data-2C-2D-3A Verify per procedure & upload-3B convergence data-3C-3D-4A Verify per procedure & upload-4B convergence data-4C-4DA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-10TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations1-Carrier2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels4-Carrier Non-adjacent ChannelsTable A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-5, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-11, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-11Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-5, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 3BBX-6, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-11, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 4BBX-12, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________2-Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-12Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX-8, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________3-Carrier Adjacent Channels4-Carrier Adjacent ChannelsTable A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-13Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-3, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-14Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 3BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 4BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-15TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations1-Carrier2-Carrier Non-adjacent ChannelsTable A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-carrier 1 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-carrier 2 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-3, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-16Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-Auditcarrier 1 post calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-Auditcarrier 2 post calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-17BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsTable A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm TestsOK Parameter Specification Data-SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure-MGLI redundancy test Verify per procedure-GLI redundancy test Verify per procedure-Power supply/converterredundancy Verify per procedure-Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure-CSM, GPS, & LFRredundancy/alarm tests Verify per procedure-LPA redundancy test Verify per procedureComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________TX Antenna VSWRTable A-15: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR - Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-18RX Antenna VSWRTable A-16: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR - Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:_________________________________________________________AMR VerificationTable A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data-Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM A”(numbers 1 -18)BTS Relay #XX -Contact AlarmSets/Clears-Verify CDI alarm inputoperation (“ALARM B” (numbers 19 -36)BTS Relay #XX -Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Serial Number Check List68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-19Site Serial Number Check ListDate SiteC-CCP ShelfSite I/O A & BC-CCP ShelfCSM-1CSM-2HSOCCD-1CCD-2AMR-1AMR-2MPC-1MPC-2Fans 1-3 GLI-1GLI-2BBX-1BBX-2BBX-3BBX-4BBX-5BBX-6BBX-7BBX-8BBX-9BBX-10BBX-11BBX-12BBX-rMCC-1MCC-2MCC-3MCC-4MCC-5MCC-6MCC-7MCC-8MCC-9A
Site Serial Number Check List 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALA-20MCC-1-10MCC-1 1MCC-1-12CIOSWITCHPS-1PS-2PS-3LPAsLPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 2ALPA 2BLPA 2CLPA 2DLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3CLPA 3DLPA 4ALPA 4BLPA 4CLPA 4DPower Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only)AMRPS 4PS 5PS 6PS 7PS 8PS 9A
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-1Appendix BPN Offset/I & Q Offset RegisterProgramming InformationB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-2PN Offset Programming InformationPN Offset BackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the correspondingI & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table B-1.PN Offset UsageOnly the 14-chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determinethe RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can bedone by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdjvalue is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS-97specifications.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.NOTE CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL orHEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal before comparingthem to cdf file I & Q value assignments.B
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-3Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA31 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D2 4700 17398 125C 43F63 14406 26333 3846 66DD4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB5 17025 2256 4281 08D06 14745 18651 3999 48DB7 2783 1094 0ADF 04468 5832 21202 16C8 52D29 12407 13841 3077 361110 31295 31767 7A3F 7C1711 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA12 18523 30999 485B 791713 29920 22420 74E0 579414 25184 20168 6260 4EC815 26282 12354 66AA 304216 30623 11187 779F 2BB317 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A18 23026 10395 59F2 289B19 20019 28035 4E33 6D8320 4050 27399 0FD2 6B0721 1557 22087 0615 564722 30262 2077 7636 081D23 18000 13758 4650 35BE24 20056 11778 4E58 2E0225 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD726 17437 7184 441D 1C1027 17438 2362 441E 093A28 5102 25840 13EE 64F029 9302 12177 2456 2F9130 17154 10402 4302 28A231 5198 1917 144E 077D32 4606 17708 11FE 452C33 24804 10630 60E4 298634 17180 6812 431C 1A9C35 10507 14350 290B 380E36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF737 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA40 10030 2010 272E 07DA41 16984 25936 4258 655042 14225 28531 3791 6F7343 26519 11952 6797 2EB044 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB45 30100 25589 7594 63F546 7922 11345 1EF2 2C5147 14199 28198 3777 6E2648 17637 13947 44E5 367B49 23081 8462 5A29 210E50 5099 9595 13EB 257B. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-4Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E52 7114 14672 1BCA 395053 7699 29415 1E13 72E754 19339 20610 4B8B 508255 28212 6479 6E34 194F56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA58 14901 22726 3A35 58C659 20160 5247 4EC0 147F60 22249 29953 56E9 750161 26582 5796 67D6 16A462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD63 15127 4528 3B17 11B064 15274 5415 3BAA 152765 23149 10294 5A6D 283666 16340 17046 3FD4 429667 27052 7846 69AC 1EA668 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A69 10620 13814 297C 35F670 15978 16854 3E6A 41D671 27966 795 6D3E 031B72 12479 9774 30BF 262E73 1536 24291 0600 5EE374 3199 3172 0C7F 0C6475 4549 2229 11C5 08B576 17888 21283 45E0 532377 13117 16905 333D 420978 7506 7062 1D52 1B9679 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C80 31109 25575 7985 63E781 29755 14244 743B 37A482 26711 28053 6857 6D9583 20397 30408 4FAD 76C884 18608 5094 48B0 13E685 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF787 23466 174 5BAA 00AE88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA89 25798 2320 64C6 091090 28134 23113 6DE6 5A4991 28024 23985 6D78 5DB192 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C93 21508 1826 5404 072294 26338 30853 66E2 788595 17186 15699 4322 3D5396 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D97 3908 25000 0F44 61A898 25390 18163 632E 46F399 27891 12555 6CF3 310B100 9620 8670 2594 21DE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-5Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A102 16876 4407 41EC 1137103 17034 1163 428A 048B104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55106 8382 8978 20BE 2312107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74112 8521 25094 2149 6206113 30232 23380 7618 5B54114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE115 27116 22821 69EC 5925116 4238 31634 108E 7B92117 5128 4403 1408 1133118 14846 689 39FE 02B1119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3122 13811 22338 35F3 5742123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E124 1213 22096 04BD 5650125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE131 594 13555 0252 34F3132 25804 8789 64CC 2255133 31013 24821 7925 60F5134 32585 21068 7F49 524C135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93136 17231 5321 434F 14C9137 31554 551 7B42 0227138 8764 12115 223C 2F53139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326140 13428 1991 3474 07C7141 17658 14404 44FA 3844142 13475 17982 34A3 463E143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36147 1377 29094 0561 71A6148 28654 653 6FEE 028D149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3150 16770 23588 4182 5C24. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-6Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E152 25685 31060 6455 7954153 21356 30875 536C 789B154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1156 22898 9586 5972 2572157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8158 30010 30389 753A 76B5159 2365 7298 093D 1C82160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6161 29740 23137 742C 5A61162 5665 24597 1621 6015163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05164 1680 7764 0690 1E54165 25861 14518 6505 38B6166 25712 21634 6470 5482167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A168 26887 26454 6907 6756169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F172 31555 758 7B43 02F6173 29171 16528 71F3 4090174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0176 30270 17698 763E 4522177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78181 15873 26696 3E01 6848182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6185 22977 9737 59C1 2609186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6187 10637 30643 298D 77B3188 25454 13230 636E 33AE189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9190 6368 2055 18E0 0807191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD194 889 6074 0379 17BA195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D196 20520 15880 5028 3E08197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA199 21639 816 5487 0330200 31120 22309 7990 5725. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-7Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316203 17429 10460 4415 28DC204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6205 17808 20277 4590 4F35206 30068 19988 7574 4E14207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5209 20371 6024 4F93 1788210 13829 20520 3605 5028211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF212 25732 26063 6484 65CF213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43214 5187 6614 1443 19D6215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA216 28242 5511 6E52 1587217 6243 17119 1863 42DF218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E220 13256 4660 33C8 1234221 18472 13881 4828 3639222 25945 16819 6559 41B3223 31051 6371 794B 18E3224 1093 24673 0445 6061225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719227 29833 5957 7489 1745228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D229 24813 22155 60ED 568B230 47 15050 002F 3ACA231 3202 16450 0C82 4042232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0234 25297 17153 62D1 4301235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9236 28519 30581 6F67 7775237 4991 3600 137F 0E10238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001239 17728 671 4540 029F240 14415 20774 384F 5126241 30976 24471 7900 5F97242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521246 8307 26143 2073 661F247 12918 13359 3276 342F248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A249 24873 13747 6129 35B3250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-8Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF254 16820 4951 41B4 1357255 22479 749 57CF 02ED256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1258 19332 2358 4B84 0936259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE260 14698 31198 396A 79DE261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB262 30475 8862 770B 229E263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7264 1912 7443 0778 1D13265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E266 15705 25093 3D59 6205267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F269 16779 32545 418B 7F21270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77272 8322 10378 2082 288A273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9274 26934 5125 6936 1405275 18806 12528 4976 30F0276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF277 9245 20959 241D 51DF278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0279 18684 26453 48FC 6755280 8220 29421 201C 72ED281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4285 12417 26028 3081 65AC286 30901 29852 78B5 749C287 9366 14978 2496 3A82288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96289 21458 25143 53D2 6237290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE291 8999 5336 2327 14D8292 26718 21885 685E 557D293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051294 27961 30097 6D39 7591295 28465 21877 6F31 5575296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-9Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B303 52 5371 0034 14FB304 27254 10242 6A76 2802305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A307 377 19550 0179 4C5E308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1310 26629 10898 6805 2A92311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0316 25560 4381 63D8 111D317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB320 26334 9037 66DE 234D321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F324 4244 16872 1094 41E8325 8499 9072 2133 2370326 9362 12966 2492 32A6327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6328 30957 25118 78ED 621E329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49331 1153 20983 0481 51F7332 29304 12372 7278 3054333 6041 13948 1799 367C334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8336 10096 17354 2770 43CA337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743342 25501 10346 639D 286A343 4489 13200 1189 3390344 31011 30402 7923 76C2345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A347 11846 21398 2E46 5396348 30331 31104 767B 7980349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-10Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA352 13173 25731 3375 6483353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C355 12083 31098 2F33 797A356 22822 16408 5926 4018357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F359 10205 14732 27DD 398C360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8361 22098 1476 5652 05C4362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD363 4408 21118 1138 527E364 102 22198 0066 56B6365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B367 26967 25802 6957 64CA368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38370 655 24248 028F 5EB8371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452374 8535 1806 2157 070E375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68377 21538 25755 5422 649B378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB380 14717 29096 397D 71A8381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95383 5008 25525 1390 63B5384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1385 22175 28855 569F 70B7386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC387 22546 20373 5812 4F95388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD389 133 26155 0085 662B390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6392 1397 21479 0575 53E7393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C396 5904 20626 1710 5092397 24341 423 5F15 01A7398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1400 1862 10818 0746 2A42. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-11Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A403 12589 14629 312D 3925404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40407 17000 29492 4268 7334408 21913 5719 5599 1657409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102417 17435 9075 441B 2373418 18527 32265 485F 7E09419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67420 18783 17434 495F 441A421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC424 10004 25384 2714 6328425 13459 18908 3493 49DC426 13383 25816 3447 64D8427 28930 4661 7102 1235428 4860 31115 12FC 798B429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B430 24161 1311 5E61 051F431 20067 16471 4E63 4057432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0434 28743 21062 7047 5246435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA436 249 10141 00F9 279D437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46438 29682 22141 73F2 567D439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724441 26706 30663 6852 77C7442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4444 5762 10228 1682 27F4445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0446 21882 18045 557A 467D447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361448 206 27066 00CE 69BA449 28798 13740 707E 35AC450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-12Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5455 23429 9816 5B85 2658456 12990 4444 32BE 115C457 12421 5664 3085 1620458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8462 30109 29971 759D 7513463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51464 4862 16910 12FE 420E465 14091 20739 370B 5103466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F469 21379 10072 5383 2758470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0473 10147 29799 27A3 7467474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8475 17359 263 43CF 0107476 13248 24734 33C0 609E477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A479 10345 25116 2869 621C480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F483 8808 28728 2268 7038484 12744 25092 31C8 6204485 11618 22601 2D62 5849486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE489 31892 17739 7C94 454B490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2493 18208 16870 4720 41E6494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23495 21901 18400 558D 47E0496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47497 18994 1937 4A32 0791498 13608 17963 3528 462B499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A. . . continued on next pageB
PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-13Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48502 23380 29989 5B54 7525503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF506 14473 28919 3889 70F7507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A510 1058 2224 0422 08B0511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB B
PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALB-14NotesB
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-1Appendix CFRU Optimization/ATP Test MatrixC
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-2FRU Optimization/ATP Test MatrixUsage & BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re-optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.NOTE Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in thetables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associatedwith it is replaced.BTS FrameTable C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTSItem Replaced Optimize:C-CCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to allCombined CDMA Channel Processor(C-CCP) shelves.Multicoupler/Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths forthe C-CCP shelf in the BTS frames.BBX board RX and TX paths of the affected C-CCPshelf / BBX board.CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affectedCDMA carrier.Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.LPA Backplane The affected sector TX path.LPA Filter The affected sector TX path.Ancillary Frame Item Replaced Optimize:Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to allBTS frame shelves.Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelvesin all BTS frames.Any RFDS componentor TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths(MONFWD/GENFWD).C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-3Inter-frame CablingOptimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cablingbetween BTS frames.Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter-frame CablingItem Replaced Optimize:Ancillary frame to BTSframe (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RXpaths.BTS frame to ancillary frame(TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.Detailed Optimization/ATP Test MatrixTable C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMFuntil full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.NOTE Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line isindicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a guidelineONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough withthe BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which testequipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will berequired before performing the Table # procedures referenced.Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directionalcouplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibrationaudit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TXpath calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to berepeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting iswarranted.Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed thatonly power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via thebreaker supplying that shelf.Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumedthat the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the PreselectorI/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were anew installation.NOTE If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, itwould be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibrationaudit command.When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. TheBBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into theiroriginal slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TXcalibration audits should then be performed.C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-4Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#pageDescriptionDirectional Coupler (RX)Directional Coupler (TX)RX FilterRX CablesTX CablesMPC/EMPCCIOC-CCP BackplaneBBXMCCCSMLFR/HSOGPSGLILPA Trunking BackplaneLPALPA Bandpass FilterPower Supply Modules**Switch CardRFDSTable 2-1 2-3 Initial Boards/Modules Install,Preliminary Operations, CDFSite Equipage; etc.DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDTable 2-2Table 2-5 2-62-14 DC Power Pre-Test PhysicalInspect D DTable 2-7 2-15 Initial Power-up D D D D DTable 3-6 3-14 Ping the Processors D D D D D DTable 3-12 3-26 Download/Enable MGLIs D D DTable 3-12 3-26 Download/Enable GLIs D D DTable 3-13 3-27 Download CSMs D D D DTable 3-13 3-27 Download MCCs D D D DTable 3-13 3-27 Download BBXs D D DTable 3-15 3-29 Enable CSMs D DTable 3-16 3-30 Enable MCCs D DTable 3-19 3-36 GPS Initialization / Verification D D DTable 3-20 3-40 LFR Initialization / Verification D DTable 3-21 3-42 HSO Initialization/Verification D DTable 3-36 3-74 TX Path Calibration 4 4 4 114*3347Table 3-37 3-76 Download Offsets to BBX 4 4 1 4 *Table 3-38 3-77 TX Path Calibration Audit 44 4 1 1 4 * 3 3 4 7Table 3-46 3-88 RFDS Calibration Procedure 6 6 545116*3346Table 4-1 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask ATP 4 4 14**** *Table 4-1 4-5 Waveform Quality (rho) ATP 4 4 *14* *****Table 4-1 4-5 Pilot Time Offset ATP 4 4 *14* *****Table 4-1 4-5 Code Domain Power / NoiseFloor 4 4 148888****Table 4-1 4-5 FER Test 55 5 52258888* 7C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-5Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#RFDSSwitch CardPower Supply Modules**LPA Bandpass FilterLPALPA Trunking BackplaneGLIGPSLFR/HSOCSMMCCBBXC-CCP BackplaneCIOMPC/EMPCTX CablesRX CablesRX FilterDirectional Coupler (TX)Directional Coupler (RX)DescriptionpageOPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGENDDRequired*Perform if necessary for additional fault isolation, repair assurance, or site certification.** Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C-CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. Ifpower to the C-CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.1Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage.2Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage.3Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.4Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier andsector TX paths.)5Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier andsector RX paths.)6Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers.)7Perform with redundant BBX for all sectors on all carriers.8Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only. C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALC-6NotesC
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALD-1Appendix DBBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS OutputD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALD-2BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output ConsiderationsUsage & BackgroundTable D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domainchannel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RFoutput (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values havebeen calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrierwith only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gainis set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlateexactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm outputrange. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 - - - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 - - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 - - - - - - 44 43 42 41 40 39517 - - - - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 - - - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 - - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 - - - - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 - - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 - - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 - - - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 - - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 - - - - 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8397 - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 . . . continued on next pageD
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALD-3Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb333435363738394041424344381 - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 - - - 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 - - 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 - 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 -246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 -238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 -230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 - -222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 - -214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 - -D
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALD-4NotesD
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-1Appendix ECDMA Operating Frequency E
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-2Operating Frequency - North American PCS BandsIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines thetransmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) foreach BBX.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum FREQ (MHz)RX TX2751175CHANNEL1863.759251851.25251871.25425675 1883.751896.251908.751943.751931.251951.251963.751976.251988.75ADBEFC . . . continued on next pageE
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-3Calculating 1900 MHz Center FrequenciesTable E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX - 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 - 80 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequencyplan.Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band onboth sides of the carrier.Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier andthe nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50575 023F 1958.75 1878.75. . . continued on next pageE
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-4Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 E
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-5800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellulartelephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency SpectrumRX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402Calculating 800 MHz Center FrequenciesTable E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1-777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013-1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX - 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHzTable E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.750050 0032 871.5000 826.5000. . . continued on next pageE
Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-6Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency75 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 E
Operating Frequency - Korean Bands68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-7Operating Frequency - Korean Bands1700 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequencyspectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum FREQ (MHz)RX TX575CHANNEL 1751.25251778.751841.251868.75E
Operating Frequency - Korean Bands 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALE-8Calculating 1700 MHz Center FrequenciesCenter frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:Direction Formula ExampleTX 1840 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25RX 1750 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25- Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA systemfrequency plan.- Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guardband on both sides of the carrier- Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMAcarrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center tocenter).Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)Channel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1841.25 1751.2550 0032 1842.50 1752.5075 004B 1843.75 1753.75100 0064 1845.00 1755.00125 007D 1846.25 1756.25150 0096 1847.50 1757.50175 00AF 1848.75 1758.75200 00C8 1850.00 1760.00225 00E1 1851.25 1761.25250 00FA 1852.50 1762.50275 0113 1853.75 1763.75300 012C 1855.00 1765.00325 0145 1856.25 1766.25350 015E 1857.50 1767.50375 0177 1858.75 1768.75400 0190 1860.00 1770.00425 01A9 1861.25 1771.25450 01C2 1862.50 1772.50475 01DB 1863.75 1773.75500 01F4 1865.00 1775.00525 020D 1866.25 1776.25550 0226 1867.50 1777.50575 023F 1868.75 1778.75E
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-1Appendix FPCS Interface Setup for ManualTesting F
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-2Test Equipment Set-upPurposeThis section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered inChapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, alongwith procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer.Equipment Warm upNOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior toperforming the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTSsite stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Timespent running initial power-up, hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up time.)CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) hasbeen replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do socould introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent testequipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating theoverall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has beenallowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.PrerequisitesPrior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations forpreparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibrationprocedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.F
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-3HP8921A System Connectivity TestFollow the steps in Table F-1 to verify that the connections between thePCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. Thesoftware also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.NOTE Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,from the system before running the connectivity software.Table F-1: System ConnectivityStep ActionNOTE- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.In the Choices selection box, select Card.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.7When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]pushbutton.8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton. F
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-4Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236)Perform the procedure in Table F-2 to calibrate the test equipment usingthe HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with theHP83236 PCS Interface.NOTE This calibration method must be executed with great care. Somelosses are measured close to the minimum limit of the powermeter sensor (-30 dBm).PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cablecalibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.Refer to Figure F-1 for location of the components on the PCS Interfaceand Communications Test Set.Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step ActionNOTEVerify that GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-1).2Press the Preset pushbutton.3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.7If using HP 83236A:Set channel number=<chan#>:- Position cursor at ChannelNumber and select it.- Enter the chan# using the numerickeypad; press [Enter] and thescreen will go blank.- When the screen reappears, thechan# will be displayed on thechannel number line.If using HP 83236B:Set channel frequency:- Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.- Select User Defined Frequency.- Go Back to Previous Menu.- Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency andenter actual RX frequency.- Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency andenter actual TX frequency.8Set RF Generator level:- Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.- Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.- When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-5Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:- Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:- Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.- Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.- Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level(1850 - 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 - 1780 for 1.7 GHz).- Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.NOTEThe Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitudeby adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.NOTEThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dBshould be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meterbefore connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting eachcomponent, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-1,Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = -1.4 dB(B) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB(B) Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total testsetup loss by adding up all the individual losses:SExample: Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB.This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.21 Select Continue (K2).22 Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-6Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fieldsnot indicated remain at default):SVerify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:- under To Screen, select More- select IO CONFIG- Set HP-IB Adrs to 18- set Mode to Talk&LstnSVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches tothe CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.- Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq25 Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-7Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(A)POWERSENSOR(C)30 dBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER150 WNON-RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSOR(B)POWERSENSOR(B)MEMORYCARDSLOT20 dB / 20 WATTATTENUATORFW00292F
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-8HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual TestingFollow the procedure in Table F-3 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box formanual testing.Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual TestingnStep ActionNOTEVerify GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.2 Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)screen.3Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.5Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.6Set channel number=<chan#>:- Position cursor at Channel Number and select.- Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).- When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.NOTEIf using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.7SSet RF Generator level= -119 dBm + Cal factorExample: -119 dBm + 2 dB = -117 dBmSContinue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).8Set RF Generator level= -116 dBm + Cal factor.Example: -116 dBm + 2 dB = -114 dBm9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:- Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Select Quit, then select Yes.F
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-9Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465NOTE Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.Perform the procedure in Table F-4 to calibrate the test cable setup usingthe Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup andcalibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step ActionNOTE- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display.2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.4Select the Setup CRT menu key.5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters:NOTEFields not listed remain at default.Generator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFF6Select the return CRT menu key.7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area.8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle itOFF.11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561LCDMA Test Source Unit.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.15 Record the power meter reading ________________________16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-10Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step ActionNOTEThe Power Meter sensor lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter beforeconnecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect eachcomponent one-at-a-time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-2, “SetupsA, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = -0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = -1.4 dB(C) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area.21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency.22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.23 Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-11Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON-RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW00320F
Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALF-12NotesF
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-1Appendix GVSWRG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-2Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWRPurposeThe following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing WaveRatio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall withinacceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in asequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlineshave been verified.These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring eachrespective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antennasystem is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peaksystem performance.The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequencyassigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the testspecification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.NOTE Motorola recommends that the installer be familiar with thefollowing procedure in its entirety before beginning the actualprocedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not in service.This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RXfrequencies for TX frequencies.Study the site engineering documents and perform the following testsonly after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required tointerconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called outin the BTS Installation Manual.Test equipmentThe following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform thistest:SLMFSDirectional couplerSCommunications test setWARNING Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA BBXchannels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in personalinjury or serious equipment damage.G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-3Equipment Setup - HP Test Set Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required tomeasure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test SetStep Action HP TEST SET1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6 to set up testequipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.2For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1 (1700/1900 MHz)or Figure G-2 (800 MHz).- Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directionalcoupler.- Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on thedirectional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.- Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.NOTEManual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):SSet screen to RF GEN.- For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrierbetween 1930-1990 MHz for TX and 1850-1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set theRF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869-894 MHz for TX and824-849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency ofactual CDMA carrier between 1840-1870 MHz for TX and 1750-1780 MHz for RX.- Set Amplitude to -30 dBm.- Set Output Port to RF OUT.- Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.3Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.NOTESet-up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):SSet screen to SPEC ANL.- Under Controls, set input port to ANT.-Set Ref Level to -40 dBm.- Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.- Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.4- Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference. - Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communicationsanalyzer and Note for as PA reference.- Record the difference of the two readings in dB.. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-4Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test SetStep HP TEST SETAction5Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.Where:RL(dB) =PA(dBm) - PS(dBm) PA = Power reflected from antennaPS = Power reflected from shortA calculated value of -13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.VSWR +ȧȧȡȢ1)10RL201–10RL20ȧȧȣȤ6If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including anyin-line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacementinformation.7Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.8Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas. Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)RF OUTONLYPORTRFIN/OUTPORTRVS(REFLECTED)PORTFEED LINE TOANTENNAUNDER TESTRF SHORT30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLEROUTPUTPORTFWD (INCIDENT)PORT 50-OHMTERMINATED LOADINPUTPORTFW00342G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-5Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)FWD (INCIDENT)PORT 50-OHMTERMINATED LOADRVS(REFLECTED)PORTFEED LINE TOANTENNAUNDER TESTRF SHORT30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER OUTPUTPORTINPUTPORTFW00343Equipment Setup - Advantest Test SetFollow the steps in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required tomeasure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test SetStep Action ADVANTEST1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6 to set up testequipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.2For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-3.- Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.- Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directionalcoupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.- Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-6Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test SetStep ADVANTESTAction3Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at -10 dBm:SPush the ADVANCE Measurement key.SPush the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.SPush the FREQ Entry key:- For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between1930-1990 MHz for TX and 1850-1910 MHz for RX.- For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between869-894 MHz for TX and 824-849 MHz for RX.- For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between1840-1870 MHz for TX and 1750-1780 MHz for RX.SPush the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the -dBm key).SVerify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.SVerify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.SPush the CW Measurement key.SPush the FREQ Entry key.- Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.- Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.SPush the Transient Measurement key.- Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.- Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).- Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTERkey).SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.4Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.5Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.6SPush the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.7Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.8Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.Where:RL(dB) =PA(dBm) - PS(dBm) PA = Power reflected from antennaPS = Power reflected from shortA calculated value of -13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.VSWR +ȧȧȡȢ1)10RL201–10RL20ȧȧȣȤ. . . continued on next pageG
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-7Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test SetStep ADVANTESTAction9If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including anyin-line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacementinformation.10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.11 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas. Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465RVS(REFLECTED)PORTFEED LINE TOANTENNAUNDER TESTRF SHORT30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLEROUTPUTPORTFWD (INCIDENT)PORT 50-OHMTERMINATED LOADINPUTPORTRF OUTRF INFW00332G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALG-8NotesG
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALH-1Appendix HDownload ROM CodeH
Download ROM Code 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALH-2Download ROM CodeDownload ROM CodeROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded changes toOOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R-levelRAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedureincludes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM codedownload.ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code filemust be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 todownload ROM code.PrerequisiteSROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.CAUTION The R-level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be thesame as the R-level of the ROM code for other devices in theBTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This procedure shouldonly be used to upgrade replacement devices for a BTS and itshould not be used to upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS isto be upgraded from one R-level to another, the optimizationand ATP procedures must first be performed with the BTS in theoriginal configuration. The upgrade should then be done by theCBSC.Table H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action1Click on the device to be downloaded.NOTEMore than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one tobe downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies.Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Status menu item.A status report window appears.4Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits inthe filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code filecan be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.5Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.NOTEROM code is automatically selected for download from the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\version folder>\<code folder> specified by the NextLoad property inthe bts-#.cdf file. To check the value of the NextLoad property, click on Util > Examine >Display Nextload. A pop-up message will show the value of the NextLoad.. . . continued on next pageH
Download ROM Code68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALH-3Table H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action6From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > ROM.- If the file matching the Hardware Binary Type of the device is found in the code folder, a statusreport shows the result of the download. Proceed to Step 12.- If a file selection window appears, select the ROM code file manually.7Double-click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.8Double-click on the Code folder.A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.! CAUTIONA ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. Thehardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable resultscan happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrongbinary type is downloaded.9Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.10 Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).The file should be highlighted.11 Click on the Load button.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTEIf the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, performsteps 6 through 11 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.12 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.13 Click on the Util menu.14 Select the Tools menu item.15 Click on the Update NextLoad>CDMA menu item.16 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.17 Click on the Save button.A pop-up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.18 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message.19 Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.20 Click on the Device menu.21 Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTEData is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use theDownload Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.22 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should beINS (green).. . . continued on next pageH
Download ROM Code 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALH-4Table H-1: Download ROM CodeStep Action23 Click on the device that was downloaded.24 Click on the Device menu.25 Click on the Status menu item.Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.26 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window. H
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-1Appendix IIn-Service CalibrationI
Introduction 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-2IntroductionPurposeThis procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiplecarriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allowsyou to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards andrecalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during amaintenance window.This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners.The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at onetime. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can becalibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remainin service and vice versa.Equipment Warm upNOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent testequipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating theoverall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has beenallowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) hasbeen replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do socould introduce measurement errors, causing incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.I
Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-3Power Delta CalibrationPower Delta Calibration IntroductionThe In-service calibration procedure has several differences from anormal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrumanalyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters arebroadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure powerduring In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. Aspectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a givenfrequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is lessaccurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate forthe difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrumanalyzer.HP8921A Power Delta CalibrationUse the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power duringIn-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value hasbeen calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to perform the HP8921A Power DeltaCalibration procedure.NOTE This procedure requires two HP8921As.Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (seeFigure I-1).2Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Generator- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency- CW RF Path to IQ- Output Port to Dupl- Data Source to Random- Amplitude to 0 dBm3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.5Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuringHP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure I-2).. . . continued on next pageI
Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-4Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action7Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.8Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Anl- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency- Input Attenuation to 0 dB- Input port to RF-IN- Gain to Auto- Analyzer Direction to Fwd9Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.10 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as resultB ________________________.11 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.12 Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable I-5). Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437BShort RF CableHP 8921ADUPLEXOUTHP437BPowerSensorSENSORFW00801I
Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-5Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921AMeasurement HP8921A Source HP8921AShort RF CableDUPLEXOUTRFIN/OUTFW00802Advantest R3465 Power Delta CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table I-2 to perform the Advantest R3465Power Delta Calibration procedure.Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.On the Advantest R3465:1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF. If not, press the Output key to toggle it OFF.On the HP 437 Power Meter:10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor(see Figure I-3).12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.. . . continued on next pageI
Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-6Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the SpectrumAnalyzer INPUT Port (see Figure I-4).16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.30 Press the return CRT menu key.31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.. . . continued on next pageI
Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-7Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable I-5). Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437BAdvantest PowerSensorRF OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORR3561LFW00803Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465R3561LRF OUTINPUTShort RF CableR3465FW00804I
Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-8HP8935 Power Delta CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table I-3 to perform the HP8935 Power DeltaCalibration procedure.Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (seeFigure I-5).2Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Gen- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency- CW RF Path to IQ- Output Port to Dupl- Data Source to Random- Amplitude to 0 dBm3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.5Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port(see Figure I-6).7Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.8Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Anl- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency- Input Attenuation to 0 dB- Input port to RF-IN- Gain to Auto- Anl Dir to Fwd9Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.10 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as resultB ________________________.12 Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.. . . continued on next pageI
Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-9Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable I-5). Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437BPowerSensorHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORFW00805Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935Short RF CableDUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUTFW00806I
Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-10Agilent E4406A Power Delta CalibrationThe Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator testequipment combination can be used for ISC of IS-2000 CDMA 1X aswell as IS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration isperformed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate thereference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offsetvalue has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A PowerDelta Calibration procedure.Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812TOptimization/ATP manual.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.NOTEFor best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter powersensor (see Figure I-7).3Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.- Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numerickeypad.- Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured (forexample, MHz).- Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).- Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.4On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.5Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.6On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.7Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to theRF INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure I-8).. . . continued on next pageI
Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-11Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep ActionNOTEDo not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the followingsteps.8Set the E4406A as follows:- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured.- Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne.- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum.- Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency.- Using the numeric keypad. enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated.- Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured (for example, MHz).- Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten.- Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.- Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile.- Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.- Using the soft keys, select Base.- Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power.9On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.10 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as result B____________________.11 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.12 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Agilent measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see step 4 inTable I-5). I
Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-12Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437PowerSensorAGILENT E4432B AND E4406AShort RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTPUTFW00858Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406AShort RFCableRF INPUTAGILENT E4432B AND E4406ARF OUTPUTFW00859I
In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-13In-Service CalibrationCAUTION This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. Thesystem has no safe-guards to stop you from doing somethingthat will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform thisprocedure during a maintenance window.Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise theentire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardwarewhen it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior toperforming this procedure.PrerequisitesSExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and theCDF file has been generated.SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage andare in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.SThe site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files havebeen loaded onto the LMF.SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.CAUTION Do not download code or data to any cards other than those youare working on. Downloading code or data to other cards willtake the site OUT OF SERVICE.The code file version numbers must match the version numberson the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, thesite may go OUT OF SERVICE.The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS musthave come from the CBSC.STest equipment has been configured per Figure I-9 and Figure I-10.SAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss isalready known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.SA short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to performCable Calibration.SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table I-1,Table I-2, or Table I-3).I
In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-14Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDSTXTESTCABLEHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00759SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRXTESTCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORT20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)I
In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-15Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDSTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFINPUTRFOUTPUTAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO 10 MHZ IN(EXT REF IN) ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER RF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTXTESTCABLERX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00759RXCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORT SIGNALGENERATOREXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)19.6608MHZCLOCKBNC“T”20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)I
In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-16Follow the procedure in Table I-5 to perform the In-Service Calibration.Table I-5: In-Service CalibrationStep ActionNOTEPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration:- Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.- Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.- Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the TestEquipment tab.Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.- Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.- Click the Apply button.- Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.- Check the In-Service Calibration check box.- Click the Apply button.- Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.2Login to the target BTS:- Select the target BTS icon.- Click the Login button at the login screen.3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:- Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.- Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop upwindow.- Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.- Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.NOTE- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.- Add the value computed in Table I-1, Table I-2, or Table I-3 to the TX Cable Loss.NOTEBe sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematicsand do not represent actual readings:- Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm- Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm- Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm- Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm. . . continued on next pageI
In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-17Table I-5: In-Service CalibrationStep Action5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:- Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.- Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of BTS installation.- Click the Save button.- Click the Dismiss button to close the window.- To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.6Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.! CAUTIONBe sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICEand can result in dropped calls.The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If thenumbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.NOTEBe sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 7, 8, and 9.7Download code and data to the target devices:- Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.- Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and clickthe Save button to close.- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.. . . continued on next pageI
In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALI-18Table I-5: In-Service CalibrationStep Action! CAUTIONPerform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.8Select the desired test:- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.- Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.- Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.- From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.- Click the OK button to start calibration.- Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to thedirectional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requiresan MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel elementsis specified in the CDF file.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gainfor the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.9Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):- Click the Save Result button on the result screen.The window closes automatically.10 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:- Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.- Close the LMF window.11 Restore the new “bts-*.cal” file to the CBSC.12 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC. I
Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-1Appendix JGPIB AddressesJ
GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-2GPIB AddressesIntroductionUse the procedures in this appendix to verify and/or change the GPIBaddresses of the applicable test equipment.HP437 Power Meter GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table J-1 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP437 GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action1 Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure J-1).2Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER.The HP-IB address is displayed.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:- Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13.- Press ENTER to set the address.4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration. Figure J-1: HP437 Power MeterENTERPRESETSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308REFJ
GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-3Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table J-2 to verify and, if necessary, change theGigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.1 Press MENU (see Figure J-2).2Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.3Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:Use the a ' arrow keys as required to select MODE.Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.5If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:Use the ' arrow key to select ADDRESS.Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.Figure J-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailMENU ENTER ARROWKEYS REF FW005641J
GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-4Motorola CyberTest GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table J-3 to verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB addressrequires the following items:SMotorola CyberTest communications analyzerSComputer running Windows 98SE or Windows 2000SMotorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”SParallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest)NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB AddressStep Action1On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAMEapplication.2In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.3CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then willopen the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the followingprocedure to change it:- Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number.- Click on the OK button.The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.NOTEVerify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear inthe IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.J
GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-5HP8935 Test Set GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table J-4 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP8935 GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB AddressStep Action* IMPORTANTThe HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will beaccessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (seeFigure J-3). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Press Shift and Inst Config.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field.- Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.- Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.3SPress Preset to return to normal operation.Figure J-3: HP8935 Test SetFW00885PresetCursor ControlShiftInst ConfigLocalJ
GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-6Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table J-5 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB AddressesStep Action1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (seeFigure J-4). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select thefield.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set theaddress.- Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.3To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1J
GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-7Figure J-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/BPresetCursor ControlShiftLocalJ
GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-8Advantest R3465 GPIB AddressTable J-6 describes the steps to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIBaddress for the Advantest R3465.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table J-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB AddressStep Action1To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:- Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure J-5).- Press LCL.- Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.- Press the vernier knob to set the address.3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.Figure J-5: R3465 Communications Test SetBNC“T”REF UNLOCK EVENSEC/SYNC IN CDMATIME BASE INPOWEROFF ONREF FW00337LCL Shift PresetGPIB and othersVernierKnobJ
GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-9RS232 GPIB Interface BoxEnsure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shownin Figure J-6.Figure J-6: RS232 GPIB Interface BoxRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSG MODEJ
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-10CDMA 2000 Test Equipment PreparationAdvantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB AddressPerform the procedure in Table J-7 and refer to Figure J-7 to verify and,if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIBaddress.Table J-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressStep Action1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.- The LED extinguishes.2Press the CONFIG key.- The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrumentdisplay.- The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey.-- A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display showing the currentGPIB address.3b - Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.-- Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Addressentry window.NOTETo correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete onecharacter at a time.3c - Press the ENTER key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.-- The GPIB Address entry window closes.-- The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label. J
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-11Figure J-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressonREMOTE LEDLCL KeyCONFIG KeySoftkey LableDisplay Area SoftkeyButtonsKeypad BS Key ENTR Keyti-CDMA-WP-00083-v01-ildoc-ftwAdvantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB AddressSet the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure J-8.Figure J-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting123 4567 854321GP-IP ADDRESS10GPIB Address set to “1”ti-CDMA-WP-00084-v01-ildoc-ftwJ
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-12Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address Follow the procedure in Table J-8 and refer to Figure J-9 to verify and,if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.Table J-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressStep Action1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.- The softkey labels will change.- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.-- In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by thecurrent GPIB address.3b - On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of18.-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.NOTETo correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at atime.3c - Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.-- The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. J
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation68P09255A61-4Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-13Figure J-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressSystem Key Bk Sp KeyEnter KeyData EntryKeypadSoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay AreaActive FunctionAreati-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftwAgilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table J-9 and refer to Figure J-10 to verify and,if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressStep Action1In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.- The softkey labels will change.- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.-- The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.-- In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the currentGPIB address.. . . continued on next pageJ
CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4Aug 20021X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALJ-14Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressStep Action3b - On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entrydisplay.NOTETo correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character ata time.3c - Press the Entr softkey button to set the new GPIB address.-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. Figure J-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressNumericKeypadSoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay AreaActive EntryAreaBackspaceKeyUtility Keyti-CDMA-WP-00086-v01-ildoc-ftwJ
FIELD TRIALAug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-1Index
Index 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALAug 2002Index-2Numbers10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-10LMF to BTS connection, 3-51700 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-71700 MHz PCS Channels, E-61900 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-21900 MHz PCS Channels, E-12-way Splitter, 1-133C-PC-COMBO CBL, 1-10800 MHz CDMA Channels, E-4800 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-4AAbbreviations and Acronyms, 1-6ACTIVE LEDGLI2, 6-22MCC, 6-26Advantest R3465, 3-43Calibrating Test Cable, F-8GPIB, J-7Agilent E4406A, calibration, 3-61Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC4850/4850E, 3-100ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-22Alarm Monitor window, 3-99alarm redundancy tests, BBX2, 3-93Alarm Reporting Display, 3-99Alarm tests, redundancy, 3-88Alarm/Redundancy Tests, Distribution Shelf, 3-91All Cal/Audit Test, 3-77, 3-78All RX, 4-2All TX, 4-2All TX/RX, 4-2AMR, No control, 6-16AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,A-17Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-15Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-1Antenna Map, 3-84ATP, 4-1Code Domain Power, 4-11Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-13generate report, 4-14Pilot Time Offset, 4-10Report, 4-14Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-7test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2Test Prerequisites, 4-3Test Procedure, 4-4testing options, 4-4Waveform Quality (rho), 4-9Automated Acceptance Test Procedure, 4-1BBackplane DIP switch settings, 2-3Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-6BBX2alarm redundancy tests, 3-93Connector, 6-14gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-1No control in the shelf, 6-16BLOCalibration, 3-68Calibration Audit, 3-76calibration data file, 3-69Calibration Failure, 6-6Download, 3-75BTSEthernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-13LMF connection, 3-5system software download, 3-3test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-16when to optimize, C-1BTS frameDC Distribution Pre-test, 2-9DC Power Pre-test, 2-7initial power-up, 2-14Create CAL File, 3-79CC-CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13, 6-14
Index68P09255A61-4FIELD TRIALAug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-3C-CCP Shelf, 1-21Site Serial Number Check List, A-18CableGPIB, 1-11LAN Cable, 1-12Calibrating, 3-47, 3-62Null Modem, 3-33Setting Loss Values, 3-66Timimg Reference, 1-11Cable CalibrationHP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236), F-3Manual, F-3CAL File, 3-79Calculating Center Frequencies1700 MHz, E-71900 MHz, E-2800 MHz, E-4CalibratingCables, 3-62RX, 3-64TX, 3-63Test Equipment, 3-60Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-8CalibrationBLO, 3-68Cable, 1-8data file, BLO, 3-69In-Service, I-15RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-72RFDS, 3-86Test Equipment, 1-8TX Path, 3-69, 3-72Test Cable Calibration, 1-8Test Equipment Calibration, 1-8Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-7Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,6-3Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-4Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5Cannot load BLO, 6-7Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-2Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Powermeasurement, 6-9Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offsetmeasurement, 6-8Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8Carrier Measurement Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9CDFsite configuration, 3-2site equipage verification, 3-3site type and equipage data information, 2-1CDF Files, Copy from CBSC, 3-8CDI Alarmwith Alarms Test Box, 3-101without Alarms Test Box, 3-103CDMA LMF, Product Description, 1-3Cell Siteequipage verification, 2-1preliminary operations, 2-1types, 3-2Cell Site Data File. See CDFChannel elements, No or missing, 6-17Channels1700 MHz, E-61900 MHz, E-1800 MHz, E-4Checksum Failure, 6-11CIO, Connectors, 6-14CLI, 1-3, 3-17Command Line Interface, 3-16Format Conventions, 3-17Logging Out, 3-22Cobra RFDSexternal housing, 1-35RF connector panel detail, 1-35Code Domain Power, 4-6ATP, 4-11Code Domain Power and Noise Floor MeasurementFailure, Troubleshooting, 6-9Code Domain Power Test, 4-11Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4Command Line Interface, 1-3, 3-17Common power supply verification, 2-13Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,Troubleshooting, 6-3
Index 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALAug 2002Index-4Communications System Analyzer, 1-11Advantest, 1-11HP8921A/600, 1-11CyberTest, 1-11Connector Functionality, Backplane,Troubleshooting, 6-13Copy CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-7Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-8Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-8Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-7Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-8Coupler, Setting Loss Value, 3-67CSMClock Source, 3-27Enable, 3-28frequency verification, 3-33functions, 3-31LEDs, 3-32MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-34redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94Reference Source Configuration Error, 6-11Troubleshooting, 6-11, 6-12CyberTest, 3-43DData Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4DC Power Pre-test+27 V BTS frame detail, 2-7-48 V BTS frame detail, 2-9BTS Frame, 2-5RFDS, 2-11RFDS detail, 2-11DC Power Problems, 6-18DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-20Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5Digital Control Problems, C-CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-15Digital Multimeter, 1-11Directional Coupler, 1-12Distribution shelf, alarm/redundancy tests, 3-91DownloadBLO, 3-75BTS, 3-24BTS system software, 3-3MGLI, 3-25Non-MGLI2 Devices, 3-26ROM Code, H-1EE1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4E4406A, calibration, 3-61EnableCSMs, 3-28MCCs, 3-30Redundant GLIs, 3-30Enabling Devices, 5-2Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, G-2Ethernet LANinterconnect diagram, 3-13Transceiver, 1-9Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,3-6FFER test, 4-13Folder Structure Overview, 3-12Foreword, xviFrame Error Rate, 4-6ATP, 4-13FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-12Frequency SpectrumKorean PCS (1700 MHz), E-6North American Cellular Telephone System (800MHz), E-4North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-1Full Optimization, 4-2GGain set point, BBX, D-1General Safety, xixGenerating an ATP Report, 4-14General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, J-2
Index68P09255A61-4FIELD TRIALAug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-5Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-43GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) GroupLine InterfaceGLI2Connector, 6-14Ethernet Connections, 6-14LED Status, 6-22No Control through span line connection, 6-15No Control via LMF, 6-15GPIBAdvantest R3465, J-7HP83236A/B, J-5HP8921A, J-5HP8935, J-4power meterGigatronics 8542B, J-2HP437B, J-1set address, Motorola CyberTest, J-3GPIB Cable, 1-11GPSInitialization/Verification, 3-35receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5redundancy alarm tests, 3-94satellite system, 3-29Test Equipment Setup, 3-33GPS Bad RX Message Type, 6-11Graphical User Interface, 1-3, 3-16GUI, 1-3, 3-16Graphical User Interface, 3-16Logging Out, 3-21HLMF Hardware Requirements, 1-9High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-13High Stability Oscillator, 3-32High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-12HP 437B, 3-43HP 83236 A, F-3HP 83236A, F-2HP 8921, 3-43HP 8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-2HP 8935, 3-43HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for ManualTesting, F-7HP Test Set, VSWR, G-2HP83236A/B, GPIB, J-5HP8921A, GPIB, J-5HP8935, GPIB, J-4HSOInitialization/Verification, 3-41redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94HyperTerminal Connection, Creating, 3-10II and Q values, B-1In-Service Calibration, I-15Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminaryoperations, 2-2Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3Initial power-upBTS frame, 2-14RFDS, 2-14Initialization/VerificationGPS, 3-35HSO, 3-41LFR, 3-39Intended reader profile, 1-14Inter-frame cabling, when to optimize, C-2IS-97 specification, B-1ISB connectors, 6-13Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-4Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-13LLANBTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-13Tester, 1-12LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-23LED, CSM, 3-32
Index 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALAug 2002Index-6LED Status, 6-20BBX2, 6-26CSM, 6-21DC/DC Converter, 6-20GLI2, 6-22LPA, 6-27MCC, 6-26LFRInitialization / Verification, 3-39receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-33Line Build Out parametersconfigure, 5-5verify, 5-4LMF, 1-8, 3-7Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,illustration, 3-6Installation and Update Procedures, 3-8Termination and Removal, 5-8to BTS connection, 3-5LMF Operation, 3-16LMF Removal, 5-8Loading Code, 3-24Logging In to a BTS, 3-18Logging Out, 3-21CLI, 3-22GUI, 3-21Logical BTS, 1-15Numbering, 1-16LoginCLI, 3-20GUI, 3-18Login Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-2Low Frequency Receiver, 3-32LPAredundancy test, 3-97test data sheetsconvergence, A-8IM Reduction, A-7LPA Module LED, 6-27LPAs, Site Serial Number Check List, A-19MManuallayout, 1-1overview, 1-2MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-22MCC, Enable, 3-30MGLI, redundancy test RFM frame, 3-98MGLI2board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5Download, 3-25Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-5MMI Connection, 3-23MMI ConnectorCSM, 6-22GLI2, 6-23MCC, 6-26MMI equipment setup, 3-23 MMI Interface Kit, 1-10Module status indicators, 6-20Multi-FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10NNAM, Valid Ranges, 3-84No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specificGLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-19No GPS Reference Source, 6-11Non-MGLI2, Download, 3-26Null Modem Cable, 3-33OOnline Help, 1-3OptimizationProcess, 3-1purpose, 1-4When, 1-5Optional Test Equipment, 1-12frequency counter, 1-12Oscilloscope, 1-13PPA Shelves, 1-22
Index68P09255A61-4FIELD TRIALAug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-7Patent Notification, xxiipathRX, 1-4TX, 1-5PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,3-5Pilot Gain, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-13Pilot Offset Acceptance test, 4-10Pilot Time Offset, 4-6, 4-10Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-104Ping, 3-13PN Offsetprogramming information, B-1usage, B-1PnMask, I and PnMask Q Values, B-2Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only), SiteSerial Number Check List, A-19Power Delta CalibrationAdvantest, I-4HP8921A, I-2HP8935, I-7Power Input, 6-13Power Meter, 1-11illustration, J-1Power meterGPIBGigatronics 8542B, J-2HP437B, J-1illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, J-2Power Meter Communication Failure,Troubleshooting, 6-2Power supply, converter redundancy, 3-89Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14power supply/converter redundancy, 3-89Pre-power tests, test data sheets, A-3Preliminary operationscell Site types, 2-1test data sheets, A-2Prepare to Leave the Siteexternal test equipment removal, 5-1LMF Removal, 5-8re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3re-connect BTS T1 spans, 5-3Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-9Verify T1/E1, 5-9Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-23PWR/ALM LEDBBX2, 6-26CSM, 6-21DC/DC Converter, 6-20generic, 6-20MCC, 6-26RRDM, 6-13Re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3Re-connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-3Reduced ATP, 4-2, 6-8redundancy/alarm tests, 3-88Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-30Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-9Reference Distribution Module, 6-13Required documents, 1-14RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-23Resetting BTS modules, 5-2Revision History, xxiRFAdapters, 1-12Attenuators, 1-12Load, 1-12RF Path Calibration, 3-72RFDSCalibration, 3-86DC Power Pre-test, 2-11Description, 3-80initial power-up, 2-14Layout, 1-35Parameter Settings, 3-81Set Configuration Data, 3-85rho, 4-6
Index 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALAug 2002Index-8rho test, 4-9ROM Code, Download, H-1RS-232 to GPIB Interface, 1-10RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-6RX path, 1-4SSector Configuration, 1-30Set Antenna Map Data, 3-84Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-5Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-66Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-67SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-3Signal Generator, 3-63, 3-64Site, equipage verification, 3-3Site checklist, data sheets, A-2Site equipage, CDF file, 3-2Site I/O board, T1 span cable connection, 5-3Site Serial Number Check List, A-18Span Framing Formatconfigure, 5-5verify, 5-4Span I/O boardE1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5Span Lineconnector , 6-13T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-13Span line, troubleshooting, 6-28Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-30Span line traffic, No or missing, 6-16Span Parameter Configurationset, procedure, 5-5verification, procedure, 5-4SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-23Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-7Spectral Purity TX Mask, 4-6Spectrum Analyzer, 1-12, 3-63, 3-64Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-44STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-23SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-2TT1isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4span connection, 5-3Test data sheetsAMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-17BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-16general optimization checklist, A-4GPS receiver operation, A-5initial power tests, A-3LFR receiver operation, A-6LPAconvergence, A-8IM Reduction, A-7pre-power tests, A-3preliminary operations, A-2RX antenna VSWR, A-17site checklist, A-2TX antenna VSWR, A-16TX BLOOffset/Power Output Verification, A-9Power Output Verification, A-14Test EquipmentAutomatically Selecting, 3-59Calibrating, 3-60Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-43Manually Selecting, 3-58Reference Chart, 3-45Selecting, 3-57verification data sheets, A-1VSWR, G-1Test Equipment Setup, 3-43GPS & LFR/HSO, 3-33HP PCS Interface, F-7RF path calibration, 3-72Test Matrix, C-3ATP optimization, C-2Test Set, Calibration, 3-57Timing Reference Cables, 1-11Top Interconnect Plate, 1-21
Index68P09255A61-4FIELD TRIALAug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-9TroubleshootingBBX2 Control Good - No (or Missing) Span LineTraffic, 6-16BLO Calibration Failure, 6-6C-CCP Backplane, 6-13, 6-14Calibration Audit Failure, 6-7Code Domain Power and Noise Floor MeasurementFailure, 6-9Code Download Failure, 6-4Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,6-3CSM Checklist, 6-11Data Download Failure, 6-4DC Power Problems, 6-18Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-5Login Failure, 6-2MGLI2 Control Good - No Control over AMR,6-16MGLI2 Control Good - No Control overCo-located GLI2, 6-15Miscellaneous Failures, 6-5Multi-FER Failure, 6-10No BBX2 Control in the Shelf - No Control overCo-located GLI2s, 6-16No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module,6-19No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,6-18No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,6-15No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15No MCC24 Channel Elements, 6-17Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-2Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,6-8Set span configuration, 6-30span problems, 6-28TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-8TSU NAMParameters, 3-83Program, 3-87TX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-68TX and RX Frequency vs Channel1700 MHz, E-71900 MHz, E-2800 MHz, E-4TX and RX Signal Routing, C-CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-19TX Audit Test, 3-76TX BLO, test data sheetsOffset/Power Output Verification, A-9Power Output Verification, A-14TX Mask test, 4-7TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,illustration, 4-8TX OUT connection, 4-3TX Output Acceptance TestsCode domain power, 4-6, 4-11introduction, 4-6Pilot Time Offset, 4-6, 4-10Spectral purity TX mask, 4-6Waveform quality (rho), 4-6, 4-9TX Path, calibration, 3-69TX path, 1-5audit, 3-76calibration, 3-72UUpdating LMF Files, 5-7UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-5VVerification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-1Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWRVSWRAdvantest Test Set, G-4Calculation, G-3, G-5Equation, G-3, G-5manual test setup detailAdvantest illustration, G-6HP illustration, G-3, G-4required test equipment, G-1transmit and receive antenna, G-1WWalsh channels, 4-11
Index 68P09255A61-41X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.xFIELD TRIALAug 2002Index-10Warm-up, 1-8Waveform Quality (rho), 4-6Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-9When to optimizeAncillary - table, C-1BTS, C-1inter-frame cabling, C-2XXircom Model PE3-10B2, LMF to BTS connection,3-5

Navigation menu